27.03.2013 Views

General Information on Track Circuits - RGS Online

General Information on Track Circuits - RGS Online

General Information on Track Circuits - RGS Online

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

Create successful ePaper yourself

Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.

Approved by<br />

Keith Turner<br />

Standards Project Manager<br />

Authorised by<br />

Richard Spoors<br />

C<strong>on</strong>troller, Railway Group Standards<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g><br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong><br />

<strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Synopsis<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> informati<strong>on</strong> to ensure that the<br />

Integrity of <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> is<br />

maintained at all times.<br />

This document is the property of<br />

Railtrack PLC. It shall not be<br />

reproduced in whole or in part without<br />

the written permissi<strong>on</strong> of the C<strong>on</strong>troller,<br />

Railway Group Standards,<br />

Railtrack PLC.<br />

Published by<br />

Safety & Standards Directorate,<br />

Railtrack PLC,<br />

Floor DP01, Railtrack House,<br />

Eust<strong>on</strong> Square,<br />

L<strong>on</strong>d<strong>on</strong> NW1 2EE<br />

© Copyright 1998 Railtrack PLC


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

This page has been left blank intenti<strong>on</strong>ally


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

C<strong>on</strong>tents<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page 1 of 2<br />

Secti<strong>on</strong> Descripti<strong>on</strong> Page<br />

Part A<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Issue Record A1<br />

Distribtui<strong>on</strong> A1<br />

Health and Safety Resp<strong>on</strong>sibilities A1<br />

Supply A1<br />

Part B<br />

1 Purpose B1<br />

2 Scope B1<br />

3 Glossary of Terms B1<br />

4 Limitati<strong>on</strong>s B5<br />

5 Introducti<strong>on</strong> B6<br />

6 Electrical Behaviour of Railway track B7<br />

7 Operati<strong>on</strong> and Adjustment of the Simple <strong>Track</strong> Circuit B9<br />

8 Train Shunt Imperfecti<strong>on</strong> B10<br />

9 Detecti<strong>on</strong> of “Lightweight” Vehicles B12<br />

10 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Insulati<strong>on</strong>s B13<br />

11 B<strong>on</strong>ding B16<br />

12 Mutual Interference Between <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> B18<br />

13 Detecti<strong>on</strong> of Rail Breaks B19<br />

14 Jointless <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> B20<br />

15 <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> and Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> B21<br />

16 The Impedance B<strong>on</strong>ds B24<br />

Part C Schematic Symbols<br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong> C1<br />

2 Drawing Symbols <strong>on</strong> B<strong>on</strong>ding Plans C1<br />

3 Tracti<strong>on</strong> Return B<strong>on</strong>ding Symbols C8<br />

4 Civil Engineer’s Scale Diagrams C10<br />

Part D Planning and Design<br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong> D1<br />

2 Resp<strong>on</strong>sibilities for B<strong>on</strong>ding Design D1<br />

3 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Nomenclature D2<br />

4 Choice of <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Type D3<br />

5 Cut Secti<strong>on</strong>s D5<br />

6 Operating Times D6<br />

7 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Interrupters D8<br />

8 Length of <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> D8<br />

9 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Gaps and Staggered IRJs D9<br />

10 Selective Operati<strong>on</strong> of <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> D9<br />

11 Bad Rail Surface D9<br />

12 Emergency Cross–overs D10<br />

13 Insulated Rail Joints and B<strong>on</strong>ding D10<br />

14 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Equipment Positi<strong>on</strong>ing D19<br />

15 Layout and Wiring of Lineside Apparatus Housing D19<br />

16 Duplicate Rail C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s D20<br />

17 Communicati<strong>on</strong>s D21<br />

RAILTRACK 1


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page 2 of 2<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Secti<strong>on</strong> Descripti<strong>on</strong> Page<br />

Part E Comp<strong>on</strong>ents and Installati<strong>on</strong><br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong> E1<br />

2 Resp<strong>on</strong>sibilities for B<strong>on</strong>ding Installati<strong>on</strong> E1<br />

3 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Interrupters E2<br />

4 Identificati<strong>on</strong> of <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Boundaries E3<br />

5 Protecti<strong>on</strong> of Cross <strong>Track</strong> Cables E3<br />

6 Mechanised track Maintenance E6<br />

7 Rail Drilling E6<br />

8 Rail C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s E7<br />

9 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> Box E17<br />

10 Arrangement of <strong>Track</strong> Lead Rail C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

(Except Jointless) E19<br />

11 Fishplate B<strong>on</strong>ding E21<br />

12 Jumper B<strong>on</strong>ding E23<br />

13 High Voltages E24<br />

14 Lineside Apparatus Housing Wiring E24<br />

15 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>ds E25<br />

16 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d Installati<strong>on</strong> E30<br />

17 Aluminium Busbars E37<br />

18 Side Leads E46<br />

19 Tracti<strong>on</strong> Negative Return Jumpers E52<br />

Part F Instrumentati<strong>on</strong> Descripti<strong>on</strong> and Use<br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong> F1<br />

2 Multi–meters F1<br />

3 The Universal Shunt Box F1<br />

4 Rail Clip Insulati<strong>on</strong> Tester F2<br />

5 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Fault Detector F4<br />

6 Mark 4 Direct Reading Phase Angle Meter F5<br />

Part G Testing and Commissi<strong>on</strong>ing<br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong> G1<br />

2 High Voltages G1<br />

3 Lineside Apparatus Housing Inspecti<strong>on</strong> G1<br />

4 B<strong>on</strong>ding Inspecti<strong>on</strong> G1<br />

5 IRJ Inspecti<strong>on</strong> G2<br />

6 Performance Test G2<br />

Part H Maintenance<br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong> H1<br />

2 Routine Examinati<strong>on</strong> H1<br />

3 Drop Shunt Test H1<br />

4 Full Test H2<br />

Part J Fault Finding<br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong> J1<br />

2 Categories of Failure J1<br />

3 Intermittent Failures J1<br />

4 Right Side Failures J2<br />

5 Wr<strong>on</strong>g Side Failures J4<br />

References Ref 1<br />

2 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Issue Record<br />

Distributi<strong>on</strong><br />

Health and Safety<br />

Resp<strong>on</strong>sibilities<br />

Supply<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Part A<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page A1 of 1<br />

This Approved Code of Practice will be updated when necessary by distributi<strong>on</strong><br />

of a replacement Part A and such other parts as are amended.<br />

Amended or additi<strong>on</strong>al parts of revised pages will be marked by a vertical black<br />

line in the adjacent margin.<br />

Part Issue Date Comments<br />

Part A One August 1994 Original document.<br />

Part B One August 1994 Original document.<br />

Part C One August 1994 Original document.<br />

Part D One August 1994 Original document.<br />

Part E One August 1994 Original document.<br />

Part F One August 1994 Original document.<br />

Part G One August 1994 Original document.<br />

Part H One August 1994 Original document.<br />

Part I not used.<br />

Part J One August 1994 Original document.<br />

References One August 1994 Original document.<br />

Part A Two December 1998 Revised document.<br />

Part B Two December 1998 Revised document.<br />

Part C Two December 1998 Revised document.<br />

Part D Two December 1998 Revised document.<br />

Part E Two December 1998 Revised document.<br />

Part F Two December 1998 Revised document.<br />

Part G Two December 1998 Revised document.<br />

Part H Two December 1998 Revised document.<br />

Part I not used.<br />

Part J Two December 1998 Revised document.<br />

References Two December 1998 Revised document.<br />

C<strong>on</strong>trolled copies of this Approved Code of Practice should be made available<br />

to all pers<strong>on</strong>nel who are resp<strong>on</strong>sible for the design, installati<strong>on</strong>, testing,<br />

maintenance and faulting of <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong>.<br />

In issuing this Approved Code of Practice, Railtrack PLC makes no warranties,<br />

express or implied, that compliance with all or any Railway Group Standards or<br />

Codes of Practice is sufficient <strong>on</strong> its own to ensure safe systems of work or<br />

operati<strong>on</strong>. Each user is reminded of its own resp<strong>on</strong>sibilities to ensure health<br />

and safety at work and its individual duties under health and safety legislati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

C<strong>on</strong>trolled and unc<strong>on</strong>trolled copies of this Approved Code of Practice may be<br />

obtained from the Industry Safety Liais<strong>on</strong> Dept, Safety and Standards<br />

Directorate, Railtrack PLC, Railtrack House DP01, Eust<strong>on</strong> Square, L<strong>on</strong>d<strong>on</strong>,<br />

NW1 2EE.<br />

RAILTRACK A1


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

This page has been left blank intenti<strong>on</strong>ally


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

1 Purpose<br />

2 Scope<br />

3 Glossary of Terms<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Part B<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B1 of 25<br />

This Approved Code of Practice gives details of best practice in respect of track<br />

circuits in general, in order to achieve the requirements of GK/RT 0251.<br />

The c<strong>on</strong>tents of this Approved Code of Practice apply to all track circuits.<br />

The definiti<strong>on</strong>s of terms used by Signal Engineers vary depending <strong>on</strong> the<br />

locati<strong>on</strong> in which they were trained. The following terms will be used as standard<br />

throughout this handbook.<br />

Bearer<br />

An item of steel or c<strong>on</strong>crete of n<strong>on</strong>–standard dimensi<strong>on</strong>s used to support the<br />

track in S & C areas (see Sleeper and Timber).<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

The electrical c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> from <strong>on</strong>e rail or part of a track circuit to any other rail or<br />

part of the track circuit.<br />

Cross B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

A tracti<strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>d cross c<strong>on</strong>necting the tracti<strong>on</strong> rails of parallel tracks to form a<br />

mesh of alternate paths for tracti<strong>on</strong> return current.<br />

Fishplate B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

Provided to ensure electrical c<strong>on</strong>tinuity between two rails mechanically<br />

c<strong>on</strong>nected by a steel fishplate.<br />

Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

Special device which presents a low impedance to tracti<strong>on</strong> current and a higher<br />

impedance to track circuit current.<br />

Parallel B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

If any secti<strong>on</strong> of a track circuit is b<strong>on</strong>ded in parallel to other secti<strong>on</strong>s of that track<br />

circuit, a disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> will not cause the track circuit to indicate the presence of<br />

a train. The actual presence of a train within that secti<strong>on</strong> may not be indicated<br />

under certain failure c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s. This method of b<strong>on</strong>ding is defined as Parallel<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding and is the n<strong>on</strong>–preferred method of b<strong>on</strong>ding. Where it cannot be<br />

avoided, special precauti<strong>on</strong>s must be taken (see individual Secti<strong>on</strong>s).<br />

Red B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

A tracti<strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>d that has been designated by the Electrificati<strong>on</strong> Engineer as being<br />

dangerous to staff if disc<strong>on</strong>nected. It is coloured red for identificati<strong>on</strong>. The<br />

Electric C<strong>on</strong>trol Room shall be advised whenever a disc<strong>on</strong>nected red b<strong>on</strong>d is<br />

observed.<br />

Series B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Series b<strong>on</strong>ding is where the track is b<strong>on</strong>ded together in series, so that if any<br />

short circuit or disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> occurs, the track circuit will indicate the apparent<br />

presence of a train. It is the preferred method of b<strong>on</strong>ding.<br />

Structure B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

A b<strong>on</strong>d that c<strong>on</strong>nects adjacent lineside metal structures to the tracti<strong>on</strong> return rail<br />

system to ensure staff safety through equi–potential z<strong>on</strong>ing.<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong> B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

A cable specifically provided for c<strong>on</strong>tinuity of tracti<strong>on</strong> current return, although it<br />

may additi<strong>on</strong>ally carry track circuit current.<br />

RAILTRACK B1


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B2 of 25<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong> Return B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

The b<strong>on</strong>ding required to carry the tracti<strong>on</strong> return current <strong>on</strong> both a.c. and d.c.<br />

electrified lines. Tracti<strong>on</strong> return b<strong>on</strong>ding is generally parallel b<strong>on</strong>ded.<br />

Transpositi<strong>on</strong> B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

A jumper cable where track circuit polarities and/or tracti<strong>on</strong> return rails are<br />

switched across a pair of IRJs.<br />

Yellow B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

A jumper cable that has been designated by the Signal Engineer to be an<br />

important part of the diverse b<strong>on</strong>ding of comm<strong>on</strong>/single rail track circuit. It is<br />

coloured yellow or identified by yellow tape. Damage must be reported and<br />

repairs carried out as a matter of priority.<br />

Clearance Point<br />

The minimum distance from switches and crossings at which track circuits<br />

having the functi<strong>on</strong> of proving clearance may be terminated to ensure a passing<br />

clearance of at least 457mm between vehicles in all circumstances.<br />

Comm<strong>on</strong> Rail (CR)<br />

A track circuit arrangement where <strong>on</strong>ly <strong>on</strong>e rail (the signal rail) is used with IRJs<br />

to separate the track circuits. The other rail (the comm<strong>on</strong> rail) is electrically<br />

c<strong>on</strong>tinuous but is not used for tracti<strong>on</strong> return purposes.<br />

Cut Secti<strong>on</strong><br />

A method of reducing the c<strong>on</strong>tinuous length of a track circuit by the use of<br />

individual track circuits, each <strong>on</strong>e c<strong>on</strong>trolling the same final TPR. These are<br />

indicated as <strong>on</strong>e track circuit <strong>on</strong> the signalman’s panel.<br />

Double Rail (DR)<br />

A track circuit arrangement where both rails are fitted with IRJs, or tuned z<strong>on</strong>es<br />

are used to completely isolate a track circuit.<br />

Drop–away Time<br />

The time between the applicati<strong>on</strong> of a shunt to the rails and the fr<strong>on</strong>t c<strong>on</strong>tacts of<br />

track relay (TR) fully opening (see also Pick–up Time).<br />

Drop Shunt<br />

The maximum value of n<strong>on</strong>–inductive resistance which, when placed across the<br />

rails, will cause the track relay to fully open its fr<strong>on</strong>t c<strong>on</strong>tacts.<br />

Fishplate<br />

Metal plates for joining rails together.<br />

Frequency Rotati<strong>on</strong><br />

The sequential applicati<strong>on</strong> of specified frequencies.<br />

Insulated Rail Joint (IRJ)<br />

A method of joining rails together whilst maintaining electrical insulati<strong>on</strong> between<br />

them.<br />

Jointed <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

<strong>Track</strong> circuits whose extremities are defined by the use of Insulated Rail Joints<br />

(IRJs).<br />

Jointless <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

<strong>Track</strong> circuits whose extremities are defined by the use of tuned circuit<br />

techniques. The extreme limits of a jointless track circuit area are either defined<br />

by the use of IRJs or by the use of a tuned circuit between the rails.<br />

B2 RAILTRACK


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B3 of 25<br />

Joint Hopping<br />

Where fast moving short vehicles pass from <strong>on</strong>e track circuit to the next, the<br />

difference between the pick–up and drop–away times can cause the vehicle to<br />

momentarily disappear.<br />

Jumper Cable<br />

Used to electrically c<strong>on</strong>nect, for track circuit or tracti<strong>on</strong> purposes, two pieces of<br />

rail that are not adjacent.<br />

Overlay <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

A track circuit which can be superimposed over another, neither having any<br />

effect <strong>on</strong> the other and both operating independently.<br />

Pick–up Shunt<br />

The minimum value of resistance between the two running rails at which the<br />

track relay will just close its fr<strong>on</strong>t c<strong>on</strong>tacts.<br />

Pick–up Time<br />

The time between the removal of a shunt from the rails and the fr<strong>on</strong>t c<strong>on</strong>tacts of<br />

the track relay making (see also Drop–away Time).<br />

Plans<br />

For the definiti<strong>on</strong> of all types of Plans, see SDH E11.<br />

Selective Operati<strong>on</strong><br />

Operati<strong>on</strong> of a porti<strong>on</strong> of a track circuit by selecti<strong>on</strong> of the positi<strong>on</strong> of a set of<br />

points. Selective operati<strong>on</strong> of track circuits is no l<strong>on</strong>ger permitted.<br />

Single Rail (SR)<br />

A track circuit arrangement where <strong>on</strong>ly <strong>on</strong>e rail (the signal rail) is used with IRJs<br />

to separate the track circuits. The other rail (the comm<strong>on</strong> rail) is electrically<br />

c<strong>on</strong>tinuous and is used for tracti<strong>on</strong> return purposes.<br />

Sleeper<br />

An item of wood, steel or c<strong>on</strong>crete of standard dimensi<strong>on</strong>s, used to support and<br />

gauge the track (see Bearer and Timber).<br />

Spur<br />

A secti<strong>on</strong> of running rail required to be electrically comm<strong>on</strong> to a series b<strong>on</strong>ded<br />

rail, but which is not itself in series.<br />

Stagger (Electrical)<br />

The phase or polarity difference between <strong>on</strong>e track circuit and the next, or<br />

between the rails <strong>on</strong> either side of an IRJ within <strong>on</strong>e track circuit.<br />

Stagger (Physical)<br />

Occurs where two IRJs in a pair of rails are not exactly opposite each other,<br />

thus creating a dead secti<strong>on</strong> between track circuits or within a track circuit.<br />

Switches & Crossings (S & C)<br />

Secti<strong>on</strong>s of track other than plain line.<br />

Tail Cable<br />

This is a cable which c<strong>on</strong>nects the lineside apparatus housing to the trackside<br />

equipment, but not direct to the running rails (see <strong>Track</strong> Cable).<br />

Timber<br />

An item of wood of n<strong>on</strong>–standard dimensi<strong>on</strong>s, used to support the track in S & C<br />

areas (see Bearer and Sleeper).<br />

RAILTRACK B3


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B4 of 25<br />

4 Limitati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

<strong>Track</strong> Cable<br />

This is a cable which c<strong>on</strong>nects the track disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> links/fuses or trackside<br />

equipment to the rails.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Jumping<br />

Occurs when a fast moving vehicle passes over a very short track circuit (or a<br />

short arm of a l<strong>on</strong>ger track circuit) and fails to de–energise the track relay.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Circuit Interrupter<br />

A device that detects the passage of a vehicle by causing a permanent<br />

disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> within the track circuit until the device has been replaced.<br />

Transpositi<strong>on</strong> Joint<br />

An IRJ where transpositi<strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ds are used to transpose the tracti<strong>on</strong> and/or<br />

track circuit rails.<br />

Catch or Trap Point<br />

A switch (ie. blades and tiebar <strong>on</strong>ly), inserted in sidings etc., to divert runaway<br />

rolling stock away from the main line, or <strong>on</strong> gradients to de–rail runaway wag<strong>on</strong>s<br />

etc.<br />

Crossing<br />

The inter secti<strong>on</strong> of two tracks <strong>on</strong> the level. Often known as a diam<strong>on</strong>d crossing<br />

due to the shape produced by the intersecting tracks. Not to be c<strong>on</strong>fused with<br />

the crossover.<br />

Switch Toes<br />

Figure B1<br />

Switch Rails<br />

Heel Of Switch Rail<br />

Stock Rails<br />

Closure Rails<br />

Rail Joint<br />

Wing Rails<br />

Crossing Nose<br />

Closure Panels<br />

Crossing Angle<br />

Check Rail<br />

Crossing Back<br />

Switch and Crossing Terms<br />

Crossover<br />

A crossover c<strong>on</strong>sists of two points arranged to link parallel tracks. They are<br />

known as facing or trailing, depending <strong>on</strong> whether a train proceeding in its<br />

correct directi<strong>on</strong> al<strong>on</strong>g the line can run directly over the facing crossover, or<br />

must reverse to cross the trailing crossover.<br />

Double Juncti<strong>on</strong><br />

The point of juncti<strong>on</strong> of two double track routes. It comprises two turnouts and a<br />

crossing.<br />

Ladder Juncti<strong>on</strong><br />

A form of juncti<strong>on</strong> eliminating the crossing.<br />

Where job titles are used within this Approved Code of Practice to reflect the<br />

anticipated functi<strong>on</strong>al splits of resp<strong>on</strong>sibility relevant to technical competence,<br />

they should not be interpreted as actual job titles. The specific split of<br />

B4 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

5 Introducti<strong>on</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B5 of 25<br />

resp<strong>on</strong>sibility will be governed by a c<strong>on</strong>tractual framework, to which reference<br />

should be made.<br />

Catalogue Numbers shown within this document are not directly c<strong>on</strong>trolled by<br />

Railtrack and as such, will not be maintained and kept up to date. Although<br />

every effort has been made to ensure that these were correct at the time of<br />

publicati<strong>on</strong>, it is therefore recommended that your supplier is c<strong>on</strong>tacted and a<br />

check is made with regard to the accuracy of these catalogue numbers prior to<br />

use.<br />

Where references are made to other documents, a comprehensive list of these<br />

will be c<strong>on</strong>tained within the “Ref” secti<strong>on</strong> of this document. The informati<strong>on</strong><br />

appertaining to these references was correct as of Issue 13 of the Railtrack<br />

Catalogue of Railway Group Standards.<br />

5.1 The Purpose of <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

The track circuit is a device designed to c<strong>on</strong>tinuously prove the absence of a<br />

train from a given secti<strong>on</strong> of track; it cannot absolutely prove the presence of a<br />

train, since its designed failure mode is to give the same indicati<strong>on</strong> as if a train is<br />

present.<br />

By proving the absence of a train, a clear track circuit can be used to c<strong>on</strong>firm<br />

that it is safe to set a route and permit a train to proceed.<br />

5.2 Fundamental Design Principle<br />

A secti<strong>on</strong> of railway track is electrically defined by the provisi<strong>on</strong> of insulated rail<br />

joints (IRJs), or equivalent, in the rails at either end as shown in Figure B2. A<br />

source of electrical energy is c<strong>on</strong>nected, via a series impedance, across the rails<br />

at <strong>on</strong>e end and a detector, which is receptive to the particular form of electrical<br />

energy, is c<strong>on</strong>nected across the rails at the other end.<br />

Figure B2<br />

Transmitter<br />

(Feed)<br />

Detector<br />

(Relay)<br />

Insulated<br />

Rail Joints<br />

With no train within its boundaries, the detector senses the transmitted electrical<br />

energy and energises the repeater circuit. This c<strong>on</strong>veys the absence of a train to<br />

the signalling system (ie. track circuit clear).<br />

A train within the track circuit will cause the rails to be short circuited such that<br />

the detector no l<strong>on</strong>ger sees sufficient electrical energy; it therefore changes<br />

state and informs the signalling system (ie. track circuit occupied).<br />

It can be seen that an electrical short circuit between the rails, caused other than<br />

by a train, or any disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> within the circuit, will fail the track circuit and<br />

inform the signalling system that the track circuit is occupied. Such a circuit<br />

c<strong>on</strong>figurati<strong>on</strong> incorporates a high degree of “fail safe”; it does, however, depend<br />

up<strong>on</strong> good electrical c<strong>on</strong>tact between the wheel sets of the train and the rails<br />

RAILTRACK B5


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B6 of 25<br />

6 Electrical Behaviour<br />

of Railway <strong>Track</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

up<strong>on</strong> which they run. It also depends up<strong>on</strong> a c<strong>on</strong>tinuous low impedance path<br />

between the steel tyres of each wheel via the c<strong>on</strong>necting axle.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> circuits apply this basic principle in a variety of ways for various reas<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

The source of electrical energy may be d.c., a.c. at power frequencies, a.c. at<br />

audio frequencies, or a series of impulses. The detector may be a simple relay,<br />

a more complex a.c. vane relay or a receiver tuned to a particular frequency or<br />

pattern of signals. Additi<strong>on</strong>al items may have to be added to overcome the<br />

problems arising from sharing the rails with heavy currents created by an electric<br />

tracti<strong>on</strong> system.<br />

6.1 Ballast Resistance<br />

Ballast resistance is the resistance between the two rails of a track circuit and<br />

comprises of leakage between the rail fixings, sleepers and earth. The value of<br />

this resistance is dependent up<strong>on</strong> the c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong> of any insulati<strong>on</strong>s, cleanliness of<br />

the ballast and the prevailing weather c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s. The ballast resistance is<br />

inversely proporti<strong>on</strong>al to track circuit length and is expressed as ohm kilometres,<br />

typical values being in the range 2 to 10Ωkm. Lower values may be obtained in<br />

wet c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s with bad drainage and/or c<strong>on</strong>taminati<strong>on</strong> with c<strong>on</strong>ductive materials.<br />

Higher values may be obtained in dry/clean c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s or during frosty weather.<br />

A reliable track circuit must therefore be able to operate over a wide variati<strong>on</strong> of<br />

ballast resistance.<br />

Most simple explanati<strong>on</strong>s of track circuit operati<strong>on</strong> portray ballast resistance as a<br />

single resistance c<strong>on</strong>nected between the rails as shown in Figure B3. Whilst<br />

such a representati<strong>on</strong> is useful in explaining the simple behaviour of d.c. track<br />

circuits, it is important to understand that the model’s limitati<strong>on</strong>s make it<br />

unsuitable to explain many of the more complex phenomena dem<strong>on</strong>strated by<br />

track circuits. For the types of track circuit used, the reactance of the ballast<br />

can be c<strong>on</strong>sidered as negligible.<br />

Figure B3<br />

B6 RAILTRACK<br />

Rail<br />

Rail<br />

Ballast<br />

Resistance<br />

When c<strong>on</strong>sidering other than the simple case, a more accurate model would<br />

represent the ballast resistance as a series of resistances between each rail and<br />

earth as shown in Figure B4. Although there is a further comp<strong>on</strong>ent of<br />

resistance between the rails independent of earth, it is high compared to the rail–<br />

earth resistance and can be discounted for most calculati<strong>on</strong>s.


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Figure B4<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B7 of 25<br />

RAILTRACK B7<br />

Rail<br />

Rail<br />

Earth<br />

6.2 Rail Impedance<br />

The d.c. resistance of rail is very low, around 0.035Ω/km, although this is<br />

increased to approximately 0.25Ω/km by the relatively higher resistance of<br />

galvanised ir<strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ds in jointed track. The inductance of rail can raise the<br />

overall impedance per rail from approximately 0.3Ω/km (50Hz) to, in the case of<br />

reed track circuits, 2.5Ω/km (400Hz) and for TI21 track circuits, 10Ω/km (2kHz).<br />

These impedance values may be increased further by large tracti<strong>on</strong> currents,<br />

due to the rail being driven toward saturati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

When c<strong>on</strong>sidering a.c. track circuits, rail inductance must be taken into account<br />

by applicati<strong>on</strong> of the further complex model including rail inductance as shown in<br />

Figure B5. Although of little c<strong>on</strong>sequence at power frequencies, audio frequency<br />

track circuits exhibit a steep decline in rail voltage as distance from the<br />

transmitter increases. Since the ballast resistance is now distributed throughout<br />

the length, detailed calculati<strong>on</strong> requires the use of hyperbolic functi<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

These effects can usually be ignored when c<strong>on</strong>sidering the operati<strong>on</strong> of a.c.<br />

power frequency track circuits, where rail voltage can be expected to decline<br />

very little between the feed and relay ends.<br />

Figure B5<br />

Rail<br />

Earth<br />

6.3 Rail to Rail Capacitance<br />

Although an even more complete picture would include rail–to–rail capacitance,<br />

this is very small and of marginal significance relative to track circuit operati<strong>on</strong> at<br />

audio frequencies.<br />

6.4 Workable Lengths of <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

It can be seen that the workable length of a track circuit is limited by three<br />

factors:<br />

• the declining value of ballast resistance;<br />

• the increasing value of rail impedance;<br />

Rail


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B8 of 25<br />

7 Operati<strong>on</strong> and<br />

Adjustment of the<br />

Simple <strong>Track</strong><br />

Circuit<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

• Immunisati<strong>on</strong> / Electrificati<strong>on</strong> requirements, including electromagnetic<br />

compatibility with trains.<br />

As the various types of track circuit feed/transmitter produce differing power<br />

outputs, and as rail impedance is frequency related, it follows that the maximum<br />

workable length will vary with design type and with the minimum ballast<br />

resistance at which the track circuit is expected to remain functi<strong>on</strong>al.<br />

C<strong>on</strong>sider the simple d.c. track circuit depicted in Figure B6.<br />

Feed<br />

Resistance<br />

Figure B6<br />

Cable<br />

Resistance<br />

Cable<br />

Resistance<br />

Train<br />

Shunt<br />

Cable<br />

Resistance<br />

Cable<br />

Resistance<br />

B8 RAILTRACK<br />

Rail<br />

Ballast<br />

Resistance<br />

7.1 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Clear<br />

The ballast resistance forms an additi<strong>on</strong>al load in parallel with the relay. As the<br />

ballast resistance falls due to wet weather, the current drawn from the feed<br />

increases. This will cause the voltage across the feed resistor to increase, so<br />

reducing the rail and relay voltages. If this reducti<strong>on</strong> causes the relay voltage to<br />

fall below the relay pick–up value, the track circuit will not clear after an<br />

occupying train has departed. A further reducti<strong>on</strong> of the relay voltage to below<br />

relay drop–away value will fail the track to the occupied state without the<br />

passage of a train.<br />

Reducing the value of feed resistance has the effect of increasing the current<br />

fed into the rails and raising the rail/relay voltage.<br />

L<strong>on</strong>g feed end leads insert additi<strong>on</strong>al n<strong>on</strong>–adjustable feed resistance and<br />

thereby reduce the effectiveness of the adjustable feed resistance. L<strong>on</strong>g relay<br />

end leads reduce the ratio of relay voltage to rail voltage by potential divider<br />

acti<strong>on</strong>; the effect is to cause the track circuit to indicate occupied at a higher<br />

ballast resistance. It therefore imposes a shorter maximum workable length.<br />

7.2 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Occupied<br />

When the track circuit is occupied by a train, a short circuit current will flow from<br />

the feed end equipment, which is limited by the value of the feed resistance and<br />

the characteristics of the feed end equipment itself. The feed end equipment is<br />

designed to cope with this worst case power dissipati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

The train shunt resistance is in parallel with the ballast resistance. With any<br />

given value of feed resistance, the relay will operate at particular values of<br />

combined ballast/train shunt resistance. Thus, higher ballast resistance will<br />

require a lower value of train shunt resistance to operate the relay and vice<br />

versa.<br />

Rail<br />

TR


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

8 Train Shunt<br />

Imperfecti<strong>on</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B9 of 25<br />

The minimum permitted drop shunt resistance is 0.5Ω (0.3Ω <strong>on</strong> certain<br />

impedance b<strong>on</strong>d track circuits). During very dry weather or severe frost<br />

c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s, the ballast resistance increases towards its natural maximum and will<br />

offer <strong>on</strong>ly a small c<strong>on</strong>tributi<strong>on</strong> towards the overall shunt. Thus, when a 0.5Ω<br />

(0.3Ω) shunt is placed across the rails, it must still reduce the relay voltage to<br />

below drop–away value.<br />

It should also be noted that the track relay is dropped by short circuit rather than<br />

disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>. Therefore, the drop–away time of the relay is increased due to<br />

the inductive circuit prol<strong>on</strong>ging the decay of the coil current.<br />

7.3 Principles of Basic Adjustment<br />

The difficulty with adjusting track circuits (where such adjustment is provided) is<br />

knowing the prevailing value of ballast resistance. Details entered <strong>on</strong> the track<br />

circuit record card provide a useful history. These vary with track circuit type<br />

and the appropriate Code of Practice within the <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Handbook should<br />

be c<strong>on</strong>sulted.<br />

Assuming average c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s, the feed resistance is adjusted to obtain a relay<br />

voltage in the range 25% to 75% above the pick–up value whilst maintaining the<br />

drop shunt resistance at a value greater than the minimum required. If the track<br />

circuit fails due to wet weather, it may be possible to remedy the situati<strong>on</strong> by<br />

reducing the feed resistance. It is important that the track circuit is re–tested<br />

after it has dried out.<br />

The energy seen by the relay with a train <strong>on</strong> the track circuit will depend up<strong>on</strong><br />

the resistive value of the train shunt (see Figure B6). This energy will be zero<br />

<strong>on</strong>ly when the train shunt is zero. Whilst the ohmic resistance of an axle and<br />

wheels is virtually zero, there are a number of factors that can make the<br />

effective train shunt much higher. Since some factors are track based, whilst<br />

others are vehicle specific, the precise mixture of factors applying to a particular<br />

vehicle at a particular place can be very variable.<br />

8.1 Rust Films<br />

Light rust film <strong>on</strong> the rail head and/or tyre tends to act as a semi–c<strong>on</strong>ductor, in<br />

that it exhibits high resistance until the voltage exceeds a particular threshold<br />

value when it breaks down completely. The breakdown voltage rises in<br />

sympathy with the extent of the c<strong>on</strong>taminati<strong>on</strong>; very heavy rust films, resulting<br />

from prol<strong>on</strong>ged disuse, render many track circuit designs incapable of detecting<br />

vehicles. Figure B7 gives an approximate characteristic of such films.<br />

Current<br />

0.01V<br />

Figure B7<br />

RAILTRACK B9<br />

Very<br />

Good<br />

Damp<br />

Light Rust<br />

Dry<br />

Light Rust<br />

Heavy Rust<br />

Or<br />

Leaf Residue<br />

Good Poor Bad<br />

0.05V 0.1V 0.3V 0.6V - 200V<br />

Voltage


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B10 of 25<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

The mechanical strength of light rust films is much reduced by the presence of<br />

moisture when the c<strong>on</strong>taminant tends to be squeezed out from the wheel–rail<br />

c<strong>on</strong>tact patch and doesn’t cause any shunting problems. Therefore, lightly<br />

rusted rails will <strong>on</strong>ly be a problem when dry. This problem is most severe when<br />

c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s are:<br />

• showery weather accompanied by drying wind; or<br />

• prol<strong>on</strong>ged periods without trains.<br />

Special precauti<strong>on</strong>s need to be taken after relaying operati<strong>on</strong>s, when track<br />

circuits must not be restored to full operati<strong>on</strong> until a reas<strong>on</strong>able surface has<br />

been created.<br />

8.2 Leaf Residue<br />

This problem is c<strong>on</strong>fined to particular areas where the extent of lineside<br />

afforestati<strong>on</strong> is significant. It is also limited to autumn when trees are shedding<br />

their leaves. Leaves are drawn into the wheel–rail interface by the passage of a<br />

train, where they are squashed into a pulp which c<strong>on</strong>taminates both rail and tyre.<br />

The severity of this problem in particular years is c<strong>on</strong>nected to the general<br />

weather situati<strong>on</strong>. In simple terms, reas<strong>on</strong>ably dry weather with little wind will<br />

cause the leaves to fall gradually over a l<strong>on</strong>g time period and to be reas<strong>on</strong>ably<br />

sap free when they do fall. C<strong>on</strong>versely, gale c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s will lead to a sudden<br />

massive fall of sap laden leaves. It is the latter situati<strong>on</strong> which gives rise to the<br />

worst c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

In terms of track circuit operati<strong>on</strong>, the electrical characteristics of severe leaf<br />

residue are similar to very heavy rust. Fortunately, the sites suffering such<br />

problems are generally known and special arrangements can be made.<br />

8.3 Coal Dust and Sand<br />

Problems with coal dust <strong>on</strong> the rail head tend to be c<strong>on</strong>fined to colliery areas,<br />

where coal deposited <strong>on</strong> the wag<strong>on</strong> chassis after loading/unloading is<br />

subsequently shaken off. Sand c<strong>on</strong>taminati<strong>on</strong> is usually associated with slow<br />

moving locomotives using their sanders excessively.<br />

In each case, the effect is similar to heavy rust films.<br />

8.4 Compositi<strong>on</strong> Tread Brake Blocks<br />

Certain types of rolling stock are fitted with a composite type of tread brake block<br />

instead of the traditi<strong>on</strong>al cast ir<strong>on</strong> variety, the intenti<strong>on</strong> being to improve brake<br />

performance. This is found to deposit a c<strong>on</strong>taminant film <strong>on</strong> the steel tyre, which<br />

tends to insulate the train from the rails.<br />

8.5 Tread and Disc Brakes<br />

When c<strong>on</strong>sidering the electrical c<strong>on</strong>tact between two pieces of metal separated<br />

by a thin film of insulati<strong>on</strong>, it can be appreciated that surface roughness of the<br />

metal can permit high spots to penetrate the film. Where this occurs, the<br />

insulati<strong>on</strong> will be ineffective.<br />

Tread brakes cause the tyres to be roughened at each brake applicati<strong>on</strong>,<br />

whereas disc brakes allow the tyres to be rolled into a very smooth surface<br />

c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>. This can be observed visually as tread braked tyres have a matt<br />

appearance, whilst disc braked tyres show a mirror–like quality.<br />

Therefore, tread braked vehicles provide a better train shunt than disc braked<br />

vehicles.<br />

8.6 Axle Weight and Suspensi<strong>on</strong> Design<br />

The pressure applied to any c<strong>on</strong>taminant film is proporti<strong>on</strong>al to the downward<br />

force of the wheel <strong>on</strong> the rail and this is proporti<strong>on</strong>al to vehicle axle weight.<br />

B10 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

9 Detecti<strong>on</strong> of<br />

“Lightweight”<br />

Vehicles<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B11 of 25<br />

In practice, wheels do not roll smoothly and fricti<strong>on</strong> free. There is a guidance<br />

force c<strong>on</strong>tinually pulling the wheelset into the correct trajectory and this guidance<br />

force is associated with microscopic slippage between wheel and rail. Advances<br />

in bogie design have tended to reduce this guidance force and slippage, giving a<br />

smoother ride for the passenger as well as reducing the wear rate of both rail<br />

and tyre.<br />

Unfortunately, these qualities reduce the ability of the tyres to penetrate any film,<br />

as well as reducing their ability to clean the rail by abrasi<strong>on</strong>.<br />

8.7 <strong>Track</strong> Geometry<br />

Vehicle guidance force and wheel rail slippage are increased in curved track.<br />

Therefore, train shunt will be improved when the vehicles are travelling <strong>on</strong><br />

curved track.<br />

If all rails and tyres were clean and wheel–rail c<strong>on</strong>tact was perfect, any type of<br />

vehicle would satisfactorily operate any type of track circuit. However,<br />

sec<strong>on</strong>dary lines in particular have suffered a fall in traffic leading to regular<br />

formati<strong>on</strong> of light rust films. At the same time, the vehicles using such lines have<br />

been increasingly of the modern DMU variety, which magnify the train shunt<br />

difficulties because of their suspensi<strong>on</strong> design, brake type, weight (which,<br />

although still heavy, is relatively light) and small number of vehicles in a train.<br />

When a vehicle is static <strong>on</strong> a light rust film, the track circuit voltage will usually<br />

break it down and the track circuit will occupy. This is because the track clear<br />

rail voltage is higher than the film breakdown voltage. However, when that<br />

vehicle is moving, the wheels are c<strong>on</strong>tinually rolling <strong>on</strong>to new film which requires<br />

to be repeatedly broken down. C<strong>on</strong>sider the following sequence of events:<br />

When a wheel first enters the track circuit, the track clear rail voltage is<br />

presented across the film. The film breaks down resulting in the rail voltage<br />

collapsing towards zero.<br />

As the wheel moves <strong>on</strong> to new surface, there is insufficient voltage available to<br />

break through the new film. The train shunt is removed and the rail voltage rises<br />

towards the clear value.<br />

When the rail voltage attains the breakdown level, the film is punctured, the train<br />

shunt re–applies and the rail voltage <strong>on</strong>ce again plummets toward zero.<br />

The result is a high frequency noise voltage across the rails which can be<br />

observed with a suitably sensitive instrument.<br />

Where the threshold breakdown voltage is less than the rail voltage at which the<br />

relay drops away, the noise will not result in track circuit malfuncti<strong>on</strong>. This<br />

parameter is used to assess the performance of various track circuit types<br />

relative to their ability to detect lightweight vehicles.<br />

To assist vehicles to shunt track circuits, a device known as the “<strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

Assister” has been fitted to modern diesel multiple units.<br />

RAILTRACK B11


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B12 of 25<br />

10 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

Insulati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

10.1 Insulated Rail Joints<br />

Insulated rail joints (IRJs) are required to join rails together mechanically but not<br />

electrically. The Permanent Way Engineer is resp<strong>on</strong>sible for the installati<strong>on</strong> and<br />

maintenance of all IRJs.<br />

10.2 Point Equipment<br />

Apart from the IRJs, used to electrically separate secti<strong>on</strong>s of rail, the reliable<br />

operati<strong>on</strong> of track circuits requires the provisi<strong>on</strong> of other insulati<strong>on</strong>s in particular<br />

circumstances.<br />

Any direct metallic c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> between the two rails will be interpreted as a train<br />

and will cause the track circuit to fail occupied. At a set of points, there are<br />

many of these c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s, which therefore need to be fitted with insulati<strong>on</strong>s, as<br />

shown in Figure B8, which is a typical example; there are, however, some<br />

regi<strong>on</strong>al variati<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

B12 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Insulati<strong>on</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

C<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B13 of 25<br />

Insulati<strong>on</strong> Insulati<strong>on</strong><br />

B<br />

A Soleplate<br />

The soleplate is formed from two metal plates secured together by a bolted c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> at an intermediate<br />

positi<strong>on</strong> between the rails, which includes insulated ferrules, washers and plates to maintain electrical<br />

separati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Where the soleplate is extended to <strong>on</strong>e side, as required for point machine operati<strong>on</strong>, a sec<strong>on</strong>d insulated<br />

c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> is provided between the point machine and the nearest rail.<br />

B Permanent Way Stretcher Bars<br />

These c<strong>on</strong>nect the two point switches together and are formed from two separate pieces c<strong>on</strong>nected<br />

together with two bolts. The bolted c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> includes insulati<strong>on</strong> ferrules, washers and plates to<br />

maintain electrical separati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

C FPL Stretcher Bar<br />

Insulati<strong>on</strong> ferrules, washers and plates are fitted where the stretcher bar is c<strong>on</strong>nected to <strong>on</strong>e of the point<br />

switch blades; usually that furthest from the drive mechanism. The design is such that the insulati<strong>on</strong> can<br />

be fitted at either end of the stretcher bar, but should not be fitted at both ends.<br />

D Point Drive Rod<br />

Insulati<strong>on</strong> is provided either separately, or is incorporated into the drive rod jaw c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong>to the point<br />

machine.<br />

E Lock & Detector Rods<br />

Insulated bushes are fitted where the screwed end c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s are attached to the switch extensi<strong>on</strong><br />

pieces.<br />

Figure B8<br />

RAILTRACK B13<br />

D<br />

E<br />

A


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B14 of 25<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

10.3 C<strong>on</strong>crete Sleepers<br />

Early forms of c<strong>on</strong>crete sleeper were fitted with chairs for bullhead rail in similar<br />

fashi<strong>on</strong> to those fitted to timber sleepers. The chair was usually secured to the<br />

sleeper with a through bolt from the underside. These did not present any<br />

widespread problem since track circuits were not comm<strong>on</strong> in the rural areas,<br />

where c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers were seen to be advantageous.<br />

Although short track circuits can be made to work over such sleepers, the ballast<br />

resistance is usually quite low and subject to more severe weather related<br />

swings. It is also now known that damp c<strong>on</strong>crete behaves as an electrochemical<br />

sec<strong>on</strong>dary cell which can give rise to residual voltage problems with d.c. track<br />

circuits.<br />

Modern c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers incorporate a rubber pad under the rail foot and<br />

moulded insulati<strong>on</strong>s where the fixings bear <strong>on</strong> the top of the foot, as shown in<br />

Figure B9. The effect is to increase ballast resistance to levels significantly<br />

higher than those obtained with timber sleepers. However, the insulati<strong>on</strong>s do<br />

erode due to the vibrati<strong>on</strong> of passing traffic and, c<strong>on</strong>sequently require periodical<br />

replacement. Lack of attenti<strong>on</strong> to insulati<strong>on</strong> usually results in gradual<br />

degradati<strong>on</strong> of the ballast resistance rather than sudden failure.<br />

Centre Leg<br />

Figure B9<br />

Fr<strong>on</strong>t Arch<br />

Heelseat<br />

Rear Arch<br />

Insulati<strong>on</strong><br />

Rail Pad<br />

Rail Foot<br />

10.4 Steel Sleepers<br />

Steel sleepers are equipped with insulati<strong>on</strong>s similar to modern c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers<br />

and, provided they are subject to an effective preventative maintenance<br />

programme, track circuits will operate satisfactorily.<br />

However, as the sleeper is in more intimate electrical c<strong>on</strong>tact with general earth,<br />

much higher levels of track circuit unreliability will result from poor insulati<strong>on</strong> than<br />

is the case with modern c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers.<br />

B14 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

11 B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B15 of 25<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding describes the means by which the individual comp<strong>on</strong>ents of the railway<br />

track are c<strong>on</strong>nected together electrically for track circuit purposes. The term<br />

also includes the additi<strong>on</strong>al electrical c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s necessary for the proper<br />

operati<strong>on</strong> of electric tracti<strong>on</strong>. Symbols used <strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ding plans are shown in Part<br />

C and various terms are explained in Secti<strong>on</strong> 3. Refer also to GK/RT0252.<br />

11.1 Series and Parallel B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

In order for a track circuit to fail safe (to show occupied) in the event of a<br />

b<strong>on</strong>ding disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>, it is necessary to b<strong>on</strong>d all elements of the track circuit in<br />

series. However, in S & C areas, it may not be physically possible to arrange<br />

total series b<strong>on</strong>ding of both rails. Examples of series and parallel b<strong>on</strong>ding are<br />

shown in Figure B10.<br />

Provided that a spur is very short, it is permissible to b<strong>on</strong>d it in parallel without<br />

additi<strong>on</strong>al safeguard. However, where the spur is l<strong>on</strong>g, or in other cases where<br />

necessary, parallel b<strong>on</strong>ding may be resorted to provided that steps are taken to<br />

ensure that vehicles are not lost due to disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> of part of the parallel<br />

system. This is achieved by creating a mesh of alternative diverse b<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

paths between parallel elements, and clearly identifying the associated b<strong>on</strong>ds by<br />

their yellow colour. It is necessary to ensure that such yellow b<strong>on</strong>ds are<br />

repaired quickly before other b<strong>on</strong>ds in the mesh have time to fail in a manner<br />

likely to cause an unsafe failure.<br />

Because of the additi<strong>on</strong>al complicati<strong>on</strong> of significant rail impedance with parallel<br />

b<strong>on</strong>ding, audio frequency track circuits are generally unsuitable in all but the<br />

simplest of pointwork.<br />

Figure B10<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Relay<br />

Preferred Series B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Feed<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Relay <strong>Track</strong> Feed<br />

N<strong>on</strong>-preffered Parallel B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

RAILTRACK B15


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B16 of 25<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

11.2 Double and Single Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Double rail track circuit arrangements have both rails fitted with IRJs to<br />

completely isolate a track circuit. Impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds are used when a tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

current return path is required. IRJs and impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds are not required with<br />

Jointless <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong>.<br />

Single rail track circuit arrangements have <strong>on</strong>ly <strong>on</strong>e rail fitted with IRJs to<br />

separate the track circuits. The other rail is electrically c<strong>on</strong>tinuous. If this<br />

c<strong>on</strong>tinuous rail is used for tracti<strong>on</strong> return purposes, the b<strong>on</strong>ding arrangement is<br />

called Single Rail B<strong>on</strong>ding. If this c<strong>on</strong>tinuous rail is not used for tracti<strong>on</strong> return<br />

purposes, the b<strong>on</strong>ding arrangement is called Comm<strong>on</strong> Rail B<strong>on</strong>ding.<br />

Whilst some designs of track circuit can be used in either single or double rail<br />

mode, others are limited to double rail applicati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

In some S & C areas and certain electric tracti<strong>on</strong> areas, it is necessary for <strong>on</strong>e<br />

or more adjacent track circuit to share <strong>on</strong>e comm<strong>on</strong> rail. This arrangement can<br />

lead to unsafe failure modes unless special steps are taken to ensure that<br />

elements of the comm<strong>on</strong> rail cannot become isolated from the remainder. This is<br />

achieved by creating a mesh of alternative diverse b<strong>on</strong>ding paths and marking<br />

the associated b<strong>on</strong>ds yellow as for the previous parallel b<strong>on</strong>ding case.<br />

11.3 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Interrupters<br />

<strong>Track</strong> circuit interrupters are used at trap or run–back catch points <strong>on</strong> lines<br />

which are track circuited. The device is designed to interrupt the track circuit in<br />

the event of a rail vehicle leaving the track. This prevents automatic re–<br />

energisati<strong>on</strong> of the track circuit after the removal of the train shunt.<br />

The interrupter is a metal device attached to the four foot side of the stock rail<br />

and usually insulated from it. It comprises a main body, a narrow neck and a<br />

head which is adjacent to the running edge and designed to break off when a rail<br />

vehicle passes over it. C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s are made to the head and the body such<br />

that electrical c<strong>on</strong>tinuity is provided between them until the interrupter is broken.<br />

The arrangement is shown in Figure B11.<br />

The interrupter is fixed within the track circuit to the stock rail (as shown in<br />

Figure B12). It is not fixed to the switch rail.<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong><br />

Points<br />

Figure B11<br />

B16 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

12 Mutual Interference<br />

Between <strong>Track</strong><br />

<strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B17 of 25<br />

Note: In all cases, the interrupter is fixed to the stock rail (as shown in Figure<br />

B12). It must not be fixed to the switch rail.<br />

Figure B12<br />

Stock Rail<br />

Switch Rail<br />

Correct Positi<strong>on</strong><br />

Incorrect Positi<strong>on</strong><br />

It is important to realise that where track circuits are c<strong>on</strong>nected together by a<br />

comm<strong>on</strong> rail, and detectors are used that are unable to discriminate between<br />

their own and other track circuit feeds, a degree of mutual interference between<br />

such track circuits is inevitable. This c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong> may be introduced by design<br />

(single rail track circuits <strong>on</strong> electrified lines) or by failure (IRJ failure of double rail<br />

track circuits).<br />

The simplest way to describe mutual interference is to use the example of two<br />

d.c. single rail track circuits as shown in Figure B13 and Figure B14. It will be<br />

realised that this model also equates to a double rail insulated track circuit with a<br />

failed IRJ. Figure B13 shows the equivalent circuit in track circuit type format,<br />

whilst Figure B14 c<strong>on</strong>verts it to a standard electrical format for easier<br />

presentati<strong>on</strong> of cause and effect.<br />

C<strong>on</strong>sider the circuit in Figure B14 under c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s where VFB feed supply is<br />

disc<strong>on</strong>nected. Clearly, a voltage will appear across RRB as a result of VFA, the<br />

value of which will depend <strong>on</strong> circuit parameters. The extent to which this<br />

voltage is of c<strong>on</strong>cern depends up<strong>on</strong> its value relative to the operating values of<br />

the relay.<br />

Provided that the b<strong>on</strong>ding remains intact, an unsafe failure cannot arise from the<br />

mutual interference; either both track circuits will fail right side (occupied) or they<br />

will both show occupied when either <strong>on</strong>e of them is legitimately occupied.<br />

However, there is the possibility of a wr<strong>on</strong>g side failure where a b<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> occurs.<br />

It is not appropriate to explain all possible scenarios here; the possibility is<br />

menti<strong>on</strong>ed simply to c<strong>on</strong>vey the fact that some track circuit defects can be<br />

exceedingly difficult to understand and explain. Certain c<strong>on</strong>straints are applied<br />

to various track circuit designs in order to limit the possibility of wr<strong>on</strong>g side<br />

failure. Therefore, the design c<strong>on</strong>straints described in the <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

Handbook shall not be breached without expert advice.<br />

RAILTRACK B17


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B18 of 25<br />

13 Detecti<strong>on</strong> of<br />

Rail Breaks<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Comm<strong>on</strong> Rail TC A TC B<br />

Figure B13<br />

RCA<br />

RRA<br />

B18 RAILTRACK<br />

RSA<br />

Notes for Figure B13 and Figure B14:<br />

RFA<br />

VFA VFB<br />

Earth<br />

RFB<br />

RSB<br />

RRB<br />

RCB<br />

TC“A” TC“B”<br />

OPEN CIRCUIT FEED VOLTAGE VFA VFB<br />

FEED RESISTANCE RFA RFB<br />

RELAY RESISTANCE RRA RRB<br />

SIGNAL RAIL EARTH RESISTANCE RSA RSB<br />

COMMON RAIL EARTH RESISTANCE RCA RCB<br />

Comm<strong>on</strong> Rail<br />

Figure B14<br />

RFA<br />

VFA<br />

RRA<br />

Further <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

R CA<br />

Earth<br />

Where rails are series b<strong>on</strong>ded, a completely broken rail will be immediately<br />

detected as a right side track circuit failure (ie. occupied).<br />

Where the rails are not series b<strong>on</strong>ded, a broken rail will not be detected by the<br />

track circuit.<br />

R SA<br />

R CB<br />

RSB<br />

RRB<br />

RFB<br />

V FB


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

14 Jointless <strong>Track</strong><br />

<strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B19 of 25<br />

Insulated rail joints can be expensive both to install and to maintain, especially <strong>on</strong><br />

tracks subjected to high speed, high axle weight traffic or where there is an<br />

intensive service.<br />

The use of audio frequencies permits the physical limits of an individual track<br />

circuit to be defined by tuned short circuits between the rails rather than by<br />

insulati<strong>on</strong> in the rails themselves. C<strong>on</strong>sider two jointless track circuits abutting at<br />

a tuned z<strong>on</strong>e as shown in Figure B15. N<strong>on</strong>–track mounted equipment has been<br />

omitted for clarity.<br />

RAILTRACK B19<br />

Tuned<br />

Z<strong>on</strong>e<br />

Feed F1 Tuning Tuning<br />

Feed F2<br />

Unit F1 Unit F2<br />

Figure B15<br />

The tuned z<strong>on</strong>e comprises a measured length of track with a tuning unit across<br />

the rails at each extremity. The track circuits operate at different audio<br />

frequencies and each tuning unit is designed to its own track frequency, such<br />

that the following criteria are obeyed:<br />

a) C<strong>on</strong>sider frequency F1:<br />

The F2 tuning unit behaves as a short circuit between the rails, due to series<br />

res<strong>on</strong>ance of its inductive and capacitive comp<strong>on</strong>ents.<br />

The F1 tuning unit tunes the two rails (inductive) and the F2 tuning unit short<br />

circuit to parallel res<strong>on</strong>ance, thus presenting a significant impedance to<br />

frequency F1.<br />

b) C<strong>on</strong>sider frequency F2:<br />

The F1 tuning unit behaves as a short circuit between the rails, due to series<br />

res<strong>on</strong>ance of its inductive and capacitive comp<strong>on</strong>ents.<br />

The F2 tuning unit tunes the two rails (inductive) and the F1 tuning unit short<br />

circuit to parallel res<strong>on</strong>ance, thus presenting a significant impedance to<br />

frequency F2.<br />

A wheelset proceeding al<strong>on</strong>g track circuit F1 will shunt the track circuit, but when<br />

it enters the tuned z<strong>on</strong>e its effectiveness will reduce until, having passed tuning<br />

unit F2 (short circuit at frequency F1), it will no l<strong>on</strong>ger shunt track circuit F1.<br />

Similarly, the wheelset would not shunt track circuit F2 as l<strong>on</strong>g as it remained <strong>on</strong><br />

track circuit F1, due to tuning unit F1 presenting a short circuit to frequency F2.<br />

As the wheelset passes F1 tuning unit, it commences to shunt frequency F2,<br />

becoming more effective as it progresses towards the F2 tuning unit and bey<strong>on</strong>d<br />

into F2 track circuit proper.


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B20 of 25<br />

15 <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> and<br />

Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

By careful design of comp<strong>on</strong>ents, it is possible to arrange a short overlap in the<br />

centre of the tuned z<strong>on</strong>e where both track circuits are effectively shunted.<br />

Since the design of individual tuning units must take account of both frequencies,<br />

it is necessary to specify the exact frequencies involved. Such equipment is<br />

therefore produced for a fixed set of frequencies and those frequencies are<br />

used in pairs alternately al<strong>on</strong>g the track.<br />

Bey<strong>on</strong>d the boundaries of electrified areas, track circuit type and c<strong>on</strong>figurati<strong>on</strong><br />

can be selected <strong>on</strong> the basis of train detecti<strong>on</strong> and ec<strong>on</strong>omic criteria al<strong>on</strong>e.<br />

However, track circuit arrangements in electrified areas are c<strong>on</strong>strained by the<br />

need to ensure safe and reliable operati<strong>on</strong> of both signalling and tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

systems. This means that the track circuit must be immune to both false<br />

operati<strong>on</strong> and damage by the flow of tracti<strong>on</strong> currents through the rails.<br />

Parallel tracks are cross-b<strong>on</strong>ded at regular intervals, such that the tracti<strong>on</strong> return<br />

current from an individual train will have a number of different parallel paths back<br />

to the supply. This minimises the impedance to the tracti<strong>on</strong> supply and hence<br />

the volt drop, whilst it also limits the amount of current which can flow through an<br />

individual track circuit.<br />

Although permitted track circuits will be inherently immune to false operati<strong>on</strong><br />

(wr<strong>on</strong>g side failure) from the presence of tracti<strong>on</strong> currents flowing in the rails, in<br />

some circumstances these can be of a magnitude sufficient to cause damage to<br />

equipment, or right side failure of the track circuit. The levels of tracti<strong>on</strong> current<br />

that the track circuit is subjected to can generally be sufficiently limited by well<br />

maintained b<strong>on</strong>ding, track circuit length restricti<strong>on</strong>s (single rail track circuits) and<br />

balance of tracti<strong>on</strong> currents between rails (double rail track circuits).<br />

Specific restricti<strong>on</strong>s related to interference are c<strong>on</strong>tained within the individual<br />

track circuit type Codes of Practice.<br />

15.1 D.C. Electrified Areas<br />

In d.c. electrified areas, the relatively low supply voltage results in high currents<br />

returning to the sub-stati<strong>on</strong>s via the running rails. In order to minimise voltage<br />

drop in the d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> supply, wherever possible, all running rails are used for<br />

the return of tracti<strong>on</strong> currents and therefore double rail track circuits are used.<br />

However, in S&C areas, it is not usually possible to b<strong>on</strong>d the track in double rail<br />

form, therefore single rail track circuits have to be installed.<br />

Traditi<strong>on</strong>ally, all track circuits in d.c. electrified areas, were operated with 50Hz<br />

a.c. current, using phase sensitive vane relays. Double rail track circuits, with<br />

impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds providing tracti<strong>on</strong> current c<strong>on</strong>tinuity, were provided <strong>on</strong> plain<br />

line and single rail track circuits in S&C areas. More recently, jointless<br />

modulated audio frequency track circuits have been introduced, reducing the<br />

number of IRJs and impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds required in plain line areas.<br />

B20 RAILTRACK


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B21 of 25<br />

15.2 A.C. Electrified Areas<br />

In present 25kV a.c. electrified areas, tracti<strong>on</strong> currents are lower than in d.c.<br />

systems and in most cases, single rail tracti<strong>on</strong> return is sufficient for<br />

electrificati<strong>on</strong> purposes. Increased traffic levels and alternative feeding<br />

arrangements, may however, increase the need for both running rails to be used<br />

for tracti<strong>on</strong> return.<br />

Traditi<strong>on</strong>ally, all track circuits in a.c. electrified areas, were operated with d.c.<br />

current, although feed and relay comp<strong>on</strong>ents are specifically modified to provide<br />

protecti<strong>on</strong> from damage and immunity to interference.<br />

15.3 Dual Electrified Areas<br />

Where tracks may be subject to the flow of both a.c. and d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> currents,<br />

the choice of track circuits is limited to those that are immune to both and do not<br />

use frequencies (including harm<strong>on</strong>ics) c<strong>on</strong>tained in the tracti<strong>on</strong> supply.<br />

15.4 Single Rail <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Where tracti<strong>on</strong> return current flows through a single rail track circuit, the majority<br />

of the current will flow in the tracti<strong>on</strong> rail, resulting in a voltage drop al<strong>on</strong>g it’s<br />

length. This voltage drop is proporti<strong>on</strong>al to the current, the track circuit length<br />

and the impedance of the rail. With a train shunt applied toward the feed end of<br />

the track circuit, this voltage drop can be presented across the signal rail and<br />

track receiver in series. Dependent up<strong>on</strong> the relative impedance of the signal rail<br />

and the receiver at the frequencies of interest, a proporti<strong>on</strong> of this voltage will be<br />

applied across the receiver.<br />

If the tracti<strong>on</strong> supply c<strong>on</strong>tains some voltage disturbance at a frequency to which<br />

the track circuit is sensitive, then this will be c<strong>on</strong>ducted through trains and flow<br />

as current through the running rails. If this is of sufficient magnitude, form and<br />

durati<strong>on</strong>, then with a train shunt at the feed end, a wr<strong>on</strong>g side failure could<br />

occur.<br />

In additi<strong>on</strong> to c<strong>on</strong>ducting the voltage ripple present <strong>on</strong> the tracti<strong>on</strong> supply,<br />

modern tracti<strong>on</strong> units employing active c<strong>on</strong>trol methods (such as three phase<br />

drives) can actively generate currents at other frequencies and superimpose<br />

them <strong>on</strong>to the supply. Whilst the tracti<strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>trol systems can be designed so as<br />

to avoid critical frequencies as far as possible, some interference c<strong>on</strong>tent at<br />

frequencies used by track circuits may be produced. Depending up<strong>on</strong> the type<br />

of tracti<strong>on</strong> unit, the magnitude of this interference c<strong>on</strong>tent may be limited by the<br />

use of an Interference Current M<strong>on</strong>itor Unit (ICMU) <strong>on</strong> the train, which will isolate<br />

the tracti<strong>on</strong> unit from the supply if sufficient interference flowing through the<br />

train, is detected. These ICMUs however, take a finite time to operate, and<br />

whilst the operate delay, due to the use of slow operating repeat relays, is<br />

generally sufficient to cope with transient interference, it may be necessary to<br />

modify the track circuits before the train can reliably operate.<br />

RAILTRACK B21


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B22 of 25<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

15.5 Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Where both running rails are used for tracti<strong>on</strong> current return, the electrificati<strong>on</strong><br />

arrangements, using impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds, are designed to keep the currents<br />

flowing in each rail balanced. Under such c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s, any interference c<strong>on</strong>tent<br />

within the tracti<strong>on</strong> current should similarly be balanced and little or no<br />

interference applied to the receiver. However, due to a number of reas<strong>on</strong>s,<br />

interference currents flowing through the track circuit may be, or become,<br />

imbalanced:<br />

• presence of check rails;<br />

• track curves;<br />

• earthing of <strong>on</strong>e rail;<br />

• b<strong>on</strong>ding differences;<br />

• asymmetric positi<strong>on</strong> of c<strong>on</strong>ductor rail / catenary;<br />

• broken rails;<br />

• disc<strong>on</strong>nected impedance b<strong>on</strong>d sideleads<br />

When the track circuit becomes unbalanced any interference in the tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

return current due either to disturbances in the supply, or generated by tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

units, will result in interference being presented to the receiver. The magnitude<br />

of this interference is largely independent of the length of the track circuit, but is<br />

proporti<strong>on</strong>al to the imbalance of currents flowing through the receiver end of the<br />

track circuit (either an impedance b<strong>on</strong>d or tuned z<strong>on</strong>e). Therefore, with a train<br />

occupying the track circuit, interference can be applied to the track receiver,<br />

which if of sufficient magnitude, form and durati<strong>on</strong>, will cause a wr<strong>on</strong>g side failure<br />

of the track circuit.<br />

15.6 Rolling Stock Compatibility<br />

Means of providing compatibility between rolling stock and track circuits, without<br />

the use of ICMUs, is preferable and modern tracti<strong>on</strong> units may be acceptable for<br />

use with the existing track circuits, if it can be dem<strong>on</strong>strated that the predictable<br />

level of interference which may be generated, is insufficient to interfere with<br />

correct track circuit operati<strong>on</strong>. Such an assessment will need to make<br />

reas<strong>on</strong>able assumpti<strong>on</strong>s as to the proporti<strong>on</strong> of tracti<strong>on</strong> current that can flow<br />

through an individual track circuit, the resulting magnitude of interference which<br />

will be presented to the track receiver and the minimum resp<strong>on</strong>se time of the<br />

receiver and interlocking. Therefore the validity of such assessments relies up<strong>on</strong><br />

the following:<br />

• cross b<strong>on</strong>ding between parallel tracks;<br />

• track circuit length limitati<strong>on</strong>s;<br />

• preventi<strong>on</strong> and detecti<strong>on</strong> of imbalance;<br />

• integrity of rails and b<strong>on</strong>ds;<br />

• operating times.<br />

CAUTION: Although general precauti<strong>on</strong>s and limits that provide<br />

compatibility between rolling stock and track circuits, have been included<br />

in the Train Detecti<strong>on</strong> Handbook Codes of Practice, these are not<br />

comprehensive and special c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s may apply to certain routes to<br />

permit the operati<strong>on</strong> of rolling stock.<br />

Where new types of rolling stock are to be introduced, existing c<strong>on</strong>straints<br />

will require reassessment, as to their adequacy.<br />

B22 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

16 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>ds<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B23 of 25<br />

16.1 Operati<strong>on</strong><br />

Impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds are devices which allow tracti<strong>on</strong> current (d.c. or a.c.) to pass<br />

through, whilst limiting the track circuit current. They are necessary wherever<br />

double rail tracti<strong>on</strong> return and IRJ dependent track circuits coexist.<br />

An impedance b<strong>on</strong>d is c<strong>on</strong>figured to provide a very low impedance path to<br />

double rail a.c. or d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> return currents (typically less than 0.4mΩ per coil)<br />

whilst presenting a high enough a.c. impedance between the rails (typically<br />

greater than 15Ω) to allow the operati<strong>on</strong> of track circuits. It also provides a<br />

centre c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> for cross b<strong>on</strong>ding, which minimises the passage of track<br />

circuit current between circuit currents.<br />

The winding c<strong>on</strong>nected between the rails is comprised of heavy gauge copper,<br />

fitted with a centre tap c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> and wound <strong>on</strong> a heavy ir<strong>on</strong> core. Provided<br />

that each running rail carries equal amounts of tracti<strong>on</strong> return current, the<br />

current from each rail passes in opposite directi<strong>on</strong>s through the coil from the rail<br />

to the centre tap c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>. The net flux in the ir<strong>on</strong> circuit will be zero and the<br />

impedance to tracti<strong>on</strong> current (d.c. or a.c.) will be very small, as shown in Figure<br />

B16.<br />

Figure B16<br />

IRJ IRJ<br />

1/2 Tracti<strong>on</strong> Current<br />

1/2 Tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

Current<br />

Cross B<strong>on</strong>d Cross B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

<strong>Track</strong><br />

Transmitter<br />

<strong>Track</strong><br />

Receiver<br />

The a.c. track circuit current attempts to flow between the two rails and is<br />

therefore in the same directi<strong>on</strong> through the two halves of the winding, resulting in<br />

the track circuit current seeing a larger, albeit still relatively small, impedance.<br />

<strong>Track</strong>–to–track cross b<strong>on</strong>ding <strong>on</strong> double rail track circuits must be provided via<br />

the centre taps of impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds <strong>on</strong> electrified lines, as shown in Figure B17.<br />

Figure B17<br />

Cross B<strong>on</strong>ds<br />

RAILTRACK B23


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B24 of 25<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

16.2 Auxilary Winding<br />

The impedance available from the simple impedance b<strong>on</strong>d remains a handicap.<br />

It is therefore usual to enhance the impedance by parallel res<strong>on</strong>ance of the<br />

tracti<strong>on</strong> winding, use being made of a step–up (approximately 50:1) transformer<br />

to reduce the value of the necessary capacitance to realistic levels. Another<br />

soluti<strong>on</strong> is to c<strong>on</strong>nect the res<strong>on</strong>ating winding to form an auto transformer, refer<br />

to 16.2.2.<br />

16.2.1 Res<strong>on</strong>ated Impedance B<strong>on</strong>ds<br />

The inducti<strong>on</strong> of the tracti<strong>on</strong> winding is tuned to res<strong>on</strong>ance at or near the track<br />

circuit operating frequency by use of a parallel capacitor, which raises the rail to<br />

rail impedance at the track circuit frequency, and thereby reduces the b<strong>on</strong>d’s<br />

effect <strong>on</strong> the track circuit.<br />

For power frequency track circuits (eg. 50 Hz), the value of capacitance required<br />

to attain res<strong>on</strong>ance is reduced to an achievable magnitude, by applying the<br />

capacitance via an auxiliary winding, as shown in Figure B18.<br />

To Next B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

Or Cross B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Figure B18<br />

Auxiliary Flux<br />

Winding<br />

B24 RAILTRACK<br />

IRJ<br />

IRJ<br />

The value of capacitance required to achieve res<strong>on</strong>ance depends <strong>on</strong> the<br />

following:<br />

a) Tracti<strong>on</strong> winding inductance, which may differ between designs. The<br />

capacitance required will vary inversely to the inductance.<br />

b) Auxiliary turns ratio, which may differ between designs. The capacitance<br />

required will vary inversely as the square of the turns ratio.<br />

c) <strong>Track</strong> circuit frequency, where the capacitance required will vary inversely<br />

as the square of the frequency.<br />

Res<strong>on</strong>ated impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds are used at the feed and relay ends of jointed<br />

audio frequency track circuits and for all intermediate b<strong>on</strong>ds associated with<br />

tracti<strong>on</strong> cross b<strong>on</strong>ding.


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page B25 of 25<br />

16.2.2 Auto Coupled Impedance B<strong>on</strong>ds<br />

The method used to couple the feed and relay ends of certain designs of track<br />

circuit into the track as shown in Figure B19. At the feed end, the reduced<br />

voltage appearing across the the tracti<strong>on</strong> winding is applied to the rails whilst at<br />

the relay end, the current from the track circuit passing through the tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

winding is usefully employed to drive the relay.<br />

IRJ<br />

To Next B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

Or Cross B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Figure B19<br />

IRJ<br />

To <strong>Track</strong> Relay Or<br />

Feed<br />

RAILTRACK B25<br />

OR<br />

To Rails<br />

To <strong>Track</strong><br />

Relay Or Feed<br />

A double rail A.C. track circuit with auto–coupled impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds is shown in<br />

Figure B20.<br />

Figure B20<br />

110V<br />

Res<strong>on</strong>ant B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

C<strong>on</strong>trol<br />

Local<br />

110V<br />

If the tracti<strong>on</strong> current in each rail is not equal, the imbalance results in a net flux<br />

in the ir<strong>on</strong> circuit, and if that flux is sufficient to saturate the ir<strong>on</strong> core, the track<br />

circuit current will be presented with a short circuit. It is therefore important to<br />

make the b<strong>on</strong>d as tolerant as possible of tracti<strong>on</strong> current imbalance and this is<br />

d<strong>on</strong>e by creating an air gap in the magnetic circuit. Such b<strong>on</strong>ds will tolerate 20%<br />

imbalance before saturati<strong>on</strong>.


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

This page is intenti<strong>on</strong>ally blank


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong><br />

2 Drawing Symbols <strong>on</strong><br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding Plans<br />

Symbol<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Part C<br />

Schematic Symbols<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page C1 of 11<br />

The schematic symbols described here apply to b<strong>on</strong>ding plans. Symbols<br />

depicting track circuits <strong>on</strong> signalling plans are to be in accordance with<br />

GK/RT0004.<br />

2.1 B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding plans must show c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s which require tracti<strong>on</strong> voltage warning<br />

labels, as shown in Part E.<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Electrified lines: Rails b<strong>on</strong>ded, but not track circuited.<br />

Electrified lines: Only <strong>on</strong>e rail c<strong>on</strong>tinuity b<strong>on</strong>ded.<br />

N<strong>on</strong>-electrified lines (In electrified areas): Rails not b<strong>on</strong>ded.<br />

Single rail tracti<strong>on</strong> return: In n<strong>on</strong>-electrified areas <strong>on</strong>e rail<br />

shall be drawn bold, this shall be the series rail for CR<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding and the positive or BX rail for DRDS B<strong>on</strong>ding.<br />

Signal rail insulated by IRJs<br />

C<strong>on</strong>tinuous tracti<strong>on</strong> return rail<br />

Stainless steel strip <strong>on</strong> rails.<br />

RAILTRACK C1


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page C2 of 11<br />

Symbol<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Insulating rail joints: Separate track circuits <strong>on</strong> both sides.<br />

Insulating rail joints: <strong>Track</strong> circuit <strong>on</strong> left, n<strong>on</strong>e <strong>on</strong> right.<br />

Insulating rail joints: <strong>Track</strong> circuit <strong>on</strong> right, n<strong>on</strong>e <strong>on</strong> left.<br />

Insulating rail joints: Between different secti<strong>on</strong>s of the same<br />

track circuit.<br />

Standard jumper b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

Yellow b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

C2 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Symbol<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Structure b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page C3 of 11<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Signal engineering equipment to rail b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

Structure to Earth Wire.<br />

Rail to rail b<strong>on</strong>d (cross b<strong>on</strong>ds) - (<strong>on</strong>e example).<br />

Return c<strong>on</strong>ductor or earth wire to rail b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> circuit interrupter.<br />

C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s for dc track circuits.<br />

C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s for ac track circuits.<br />

RAILTRACK C3


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page C4 of 11<br />

Symbol<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s for HVI track circuits.<br />

Guard boarding The provisi<strong>on</strong> of guard boarding will be<br />

indicated by a thin line <strong>on</strong> whichever side<br />

of the c<strong>on</strong>ductor rail it is required.<br />

A suitable note may be added if required.<br />

Insulated buffer stops.<br />

N<strong>on</strong>-insulated buffer stops.<br />

Insulated points.<br />

N<strong>on</strong>-insulated points.<br />

2.2 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Actuator Interference Detector (TCAID)<br />

TCAID-N or TCAID (MC)<br />

TCAID-D, detecti<strong>on</strong> to the right<br />

TCAID-D, detecti<strong>on</strong> to the left<br />

C4 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Symbol<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page C5 of 11<br />

2.3 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>ds<br />

If an impedance b<strong>on</strong>d c<strong>on</strong>tains an internal res<strong>on</strong>ating capacitor, the symbol must<br />

be shown filled in.<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Double rail to double rail track circuits.<br />

Double rail to single rail track circuits.<br />

Double rail track circuits to n<strong>on</strong>-track circuited line.<br />

Intermediate impedance b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

Cross B<strong>on</strong>ds (<strong>Track</strong> to track b<strong>on</strong>ds): Using impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds<br />

in double rail areas.<br />

Tuned impedance b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

RAILTRACK C5


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page C6 of 11<br />

Symbol<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

2.4 Symbols For TI21 Jointless <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Tuned z<strong>on</strong>e with a transmitter and a receiver.<br />

Transmitter of centre fed track circuit at an end tuning unit (ETU).<br />

Receiver at an IRJ with an end tuning unit (ETU).<br />

Low power: Show at transmitter <strong>on</strong>ly.<br />

Example of a TI21 track circuit b<strong>on</strong>ding plan.<br />

C6 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Symbol<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

2.5 Symbols For Reed <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Transmitter.<br />

Receiver.<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page C7 of 11<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Intermediate simple loop (loop symbol points towards TX).<br />

Compound loop (loop symbol points towards TX).<br />

Example of a jointed reed track circuit b<strong>on</strong>ding plan electrified.<br />

Example of a jointless reed track circuit b<strong>on</strong>ding plan.<br />

Note: <strong>Track</strong> circuit frequency is indicated in ( ) brackets following the track circuit name.<br />

RAILTRACK C7


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page C8 of 11<br />

3 Tracti<strong>on</strong> Return<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding Symbols<br />

Symbol<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Separate Tracti<strong>on</strong> Return B<strong>on</strong>ding Plans are <strong>on</strong>ly used <strong>on</strong> the former Southern<br />

Regi<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Running rail b<strong>on</strong>ded at each rail joint for dc electric tracti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Insulated rail joint.<br />

Res<strong>on</strong>ating b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

Impedance b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> circuit cut secti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

To specify that more than <strong>on</strong>e b<strong>on</strong>d<br />

is required, indicate as shown.<br />

C8 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Symbol<br />

Cable Identificati<strong>on</strong> Codes<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Single protective boarding.<br />

Double protective boarding.<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page C9 of 11<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Insulated rail joint and c<strong>on</strong>tinuity cable<br />

to eliminate magnetisati<strong>on</strong> of points.<br />

Aluminium advance plate: Only installed for attachment<br />

of tracti<strong>on</strong> return b<strong>on</strong>ds in areas<br />

of single rail tracti<strong>on</strong> return.<br />

a Single 500mm sheathed copper cable (soldered lugs) or single 800mm<br />

sheathed aluminium cable (crimped aluminium or Cadweld aluminium lug).<br />

c Single 161mm sheathed copper cable (gas weld heads).<br />

d Single 161mm sheathed copper cable (soldered lugs) or single 240mm sheathed<br />

aluminium cable (Cadweld aluminium or copper lug or crimped aluminium lug).<br />

f Single 161mm bare copper cable (gas weld heads) or single 150mm aluminium<br />

cable (crimped 20 bi-metal b<strong>on</strong>d heads).<br />

g Single 161mm copper cable (soldered 20 copper b<strong>on</strong>d heads).<br />

h Single 161mm sheathed cable (<strong>on</strong>e gas weld head and <strong>on</strong>e soldered lug).<br />

j Single 161mm sheathed cable (<strong>on</strong>e soldered lug and <strong>on</strong>e soldered 20 copper b<strong>on</strong>d<br />

head) or single 150mm sheathed aluminium cable (<strong>on</strong>e crimped 20 bi-metal b<strong>on</strong>d<br />

head and <strong>on</strong>e crimped aluminium lug).<br />

m Single 1,000mm sheathed aluminium cable.<br />

Nn Single 630mm sheathed copper cable.<br />

RAILTRACK C9


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page C10 of 11<br />

Symbol<br />

4 Engineer’s<br />

Scale Diagrams<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

4.1 <str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> Symbols<br />

These symbols are to be used <strong>on</strong> the 1:100 and 1:200 scale diagrams when<br />

requesting IRJs and point insulati<strong>on</strong>s to be installed by the Permanent Way<br />

Engineer. The symbols are to be coloured red <strong>on</strong> plans returned to the<br />

Permanent Way Engineer.<br />

Note: On Permanent Way Engineer’s Plans, dimensi<strong>on</strong>s are to the inside<br />

edges of rails.<br />

Insulated rail joint required.<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Insulated soleplate and stretcher bars required (positi<strong>on</strong> of insulati<strong>on</strong><br />

to be shown).<br />

Drilling of insulated soleplate for facing point lock required, to<br />

MD 82017 (positi<strong>on</strong> of insulati<strong>on</strong> to be shown).<br />

Extended sleepers and soleplate required for the installati<strong>on</strong> of<br />

combined type machines with left hand drive (show in reverse for right<br />

hand drive). Standard facing points (not clamp locks), drilled to<br />

BRS-SM 318.<br />

Extended sleepers and soleplate required for the installati<strong>on</strong> of<br />

combined type machine. Right hand drive for single or double slips (not<br />

clamp locks), drilled to BRS-SM 319.<br />

C10 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Symbol<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page C11 of 11<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Extended sleepers and soleplate required for the installati<strong>on</strong> of<br />

combined type machine. Left hand drive for single or double slips (not<br />

clamp locks), drilled to BRS-SM 320.<br />

Indicates switch rail, stock rail and soleplate to be pre-drilled for<br />

hydraulic clamp locks with multiple drives and soleplate, in accordance<br />

with BRS-SM 2200, 2228, 2240, 2244 or 2260, as appropriate. If<br />

c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers are to be used, they are required to be drilled in<br />

accordance with BRS-SM 622.<br />

Stainless steel strip welded to rails required.<br />

RAILTRACK C11


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

This page is intenti<strong>on</strong>ally blank.


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong><br />

2 Resp<strong>on</strong>sibilities for<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding Design<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Part D<br />

Planning and Design<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D1 of 20<br />

The principles laid down here apply to the planning, layout and design of all<br />

types of track circuits and track circuit b<strong>on</strong>ding. Special requirements for<br />

individual types of track circuit are given in subsequent Codes of Practice within<br />

the <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Handbook. Signalling design requirements are c<strong>on</strong>tained in<br />

GK/RT0201.<br />

Many of the parameters affecting track circuit design are related to the physical<br />

and electrical characteristics of the trains operating over the track circuits.<br />

Dimensi<strong>on</strong>s of track secti<strong>on</strong>s which are critical for achieving safe and reliable<br />

detecti<strong>on</strong> are c<strong>on</strong>tained in GK/RT0011 Appendix A. If the accuracy quoted<br />

cannot be attained, dimensi<strong>on</strong>s should be rounded up unless otherwise stated<br />

(ie. if a maximum is given).<br />

For a descripti<strong>on</strong> of terms and definiti<strong>on</strong>s used in track circuit design and<br />

operati<strong>on</strong>, see Part B.<br />

For details of symbols used <strong>on</strong> scheme plans and b<strong>on</strong>ding plans, see Part C.<br />

2.1 <str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g><br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding requirements are c<strong>on</strong>tained in GK/RT0252.<br />

2.2 N<strong>on</strong>–electrified Lines<br />

The design of all track circuit b<strong>on</strong>ding <strong>on</strong> n<strong>on</strong>–electrified lines is the resp<strong>on</strong>sibility<br />

of the Signal Engineer.<br />

This requires the producti<strong>on</strong> of detailed scale b<strong>on</strong>ding plans for all track circuiting<br />

in switch & crossing work, usually based <strong>on</strong> the Permanent Way Engineer’s<br />

track layout plan. On plain line a detailed b<strong>on</strong>ding plan need not be produced,<br />

as l<strong>on</strong>g as sufficient detail of feed and relay leads is provided in lineside<br />

apparatus housing diagrams.<br />

2.3 Electrified Lines<br />

Both Signal and Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineers require c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s to the running<br />

rails, so compatibility between them is essential. In additi<strong>on</strong>, there are a number<br />

of c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s up<strong>on</strong> which there is comm<strong>on</strong> reliance. It is therefore necessary<br />

to have comm<strong>on</strong> plans/records that show in detail the track b<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

arrangements. There must be agreement between both parties before any new<br />

work or alterati<strong>on</strong>s are carried out. Design Standards are c<strong>on</strong>tained in<br />

GM/TT0126 and GM/TT0129.<br />

The Signal Engineer is resp<strong>on</strong>sible for the design of:<br />

a) All fishplate b<strong>on</strong>ds in n<strong>on</strong>–tracti<strong>on</strong> rails.<br />

b) All fishplate b<strong>on</strong>ds in tracti<strong>on</strong> rails of a.c. <strong>on</strong>ly electrified areas.<br />

c) The positi<strong>on</strong> of all insulated rail joints.<br />

d) All jumper b<strong>on</strong>ds between separate secti<strong>on</strong>s of n<strong>on</strong>–tracti<strong>on</strong> rails.<br />

RAILTRACK D1


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D2 of 20<br />

3 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

Nomenclature<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

e) In a.c. electrified areas (excluding the former Southern Regi<strong>on</strong>), all rail to<br />

impedance b<strong>on</strong>d c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s and c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s between impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds <strong>on</strong><br />

the same track.<br />

f) In dual a.c./d.c. and d.c. electrified areas (excluding the former Southern<br />

Regi<strong>on</strong>), the resp<strong>on</strong>sibility for impedance b<strong>on</strong>d c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s is subject to<br />

special arrangements between the Signal and Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineers.<br />

g) On the former Southern Regi<strong>on</strong>, impedance b<strong>on</strong>d c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s for track<br />

circuit <strong>on</strong>ly purposes.<br />

h) All track circuit rail c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

i) Identifying the need for Yellow B<strong>on</strong>ding and specifying which b<strong>on</strong>ds are to<br />

be yellow.<br />

The Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer is resp<strong>on</strong>sible for the design of:<br />

a) All fishplate b<strong>on</strong>ds in d.c. or dual a.c./d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> rails.<br />

b) All jumpers b<strong>on</strong>ds between separate secti<strong>on</strong>s of tracti<strong>on</strong> rails and between<br />

the centre c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> of impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds in different tracks.<br />

c) On the former Southern Regi<strong>on</strong>, rail to impedance b<strong>on</strong>d c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s for<br />

tracti<strong>on</strong> purposes.<br />

d) All other permanent tracti<strong>on</strong> related b<strong>on</strong>ding.<br />

2.4 Adjacent Lines<br />

In all cases where lines run adjacent to or cross each other, but are not<br />

physically c<strong>on</strong>nected, all these lines must be represented <strong>on</strong> the b<strong>on</strong>ding plans<br />

and the b<strong>on</strong>ding plans cross referenced to each other.<br />

Identificati<strong>on</strong> of individual track circuits is to be in accordance with Standard<br />

Signalling Principle No. 54 and must be shown <strong>on</strong> plans at c<strong>on</strong>venient intervals<br />

within the respective track circuit.<br />

To avoid c<strong>on</strong>fusi<strong>on</strong> with other plan annotati<strong>on</strong>, the following <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

designati<strong>on</strong>s are to be avoided:<br />

B, F, I, N, O, R, Q, T, CL, OL, HVI, RB, RN, RR, RT, RX, TB, TC, TF, TFR, TI,<br />

TJ, TN, TO, TR, TX, VT, IBJ, IRJ, OCC.<br />

D2 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

4 Choice of <strong>Track</strong><br />

Circuit Type<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D3 of 20<br />

There are a number of design features of track circuits which c<strong>on</strong>strain choice<br />

for a given applicati<strong>on</strong>:<br />

a) The need to detect vehicles <strong>on</strong> poor rail surfaces.<br />

b) The need or otherwise to avoid insulated rail joints.<br />

c) The need for immunity to a.c. and/or d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> interference.<br />

d) The need to achieve maximum reliability at ec<strong>on</strong>omic cost.<br />

e) The need to track circuit through complex S & C.<br />

The Figure D1 summarises the key attributes and limitati<strong>on</strong>s of each type of<br />

track circuit.<br />

CAUTION: Although general precauti<strong>on</strong>s and limits that provide<br />

compatibility between rolling stock and track circuits, have been included<br />

in the Train Detecti<strong>on</strong> Handbook Codes of Practice, these are not<br />

comprehensive and special c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s may apply to certain routes to<br />

permit the operati<strong>on</strong> of rolling stock.<br />

Where new types of rolling stock are to be introduced, existing c<strong>on</strong>straints<br />

will require reassessment, as to their adequacy.<br />

RAILTRACK D3


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D4 of 20<br />

Type Suitable For<br />

Lightly Used<br />

Lines<br />

D.C. Medium Voltage<br />

A.C. Immune #1<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

IRJs<br />

Required<br />

Immunity From Suitable<br />

For S & C<br />

a.c.<br />

50Hz d.c.<br />

Yes Yes Yes No Yes<br />

D.C. Diode #1 Yes Yes No No No<br />

TI21 #1 No No Yes#4 Yes No<br />

HVI #1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes<br />

D.C. Low Voltage Plain No Yes No No Yes<br />

D.C. Low Voltage<br />

A.C. Immune<br />

D.C. Medium Voltage<br />

Plain<br />

D.C. Medium Voltage<br />

A.C. Immune/D.C.<br />

Tolerant<br />

A.C. WR Quick<br />

Release<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

No Yes Yes No Yes<br />

Yes Yes No No Yes<br />

Yes Yes Yes Yes#2 Yes<br />

No Yes No No Yes<br />

A.C. 50Hz Vane No Yes No Yes Yes#3<br />

A.C. 83.3Hz Vane No Yes Yes Yes Yes#3<br />

Reed No Yes Yes Yes Yes<br />

Aster/SF15 No No No No No<br />

Notes:<br />

# 1 Preferred track circuits for new works.<br />

# 2 Limited dc immunity. Used in an area of ac lines close to ac/dc dual<br />

lines not fitted with any means of isolating the tracti<strong>on</strong> rail systems. Use<br />

must be subject to a proper immunisati<strong>on</strong> evaluati<strong>on</strong> exercise.<br />

# 3 Single rail type has restricted length but adequate for S & C<br />

applicati<strong>on</strong>. Double rail type is difficult in complex S & C but permits l<strong>on</strong>g<br />

length in plain line.<br />

# 4 The use of TI21 <strong>on</strong> ac electrified lines requires the earthing of<br />

lineside structures to be to a separate c<strong>on</strong>ductor rather than to the rail.<br />

This precludes the use of TI21 <strong>on</strong> ac lines unless part of a major new<br />

electrificati<strong>on</strong> scheme.<br />

Figure D1<br />

D4 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

5 Cut Secti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D5 of 20<br />

Designing cut secti<strong>on</strong>s into a track circuit is a method of reducing the c<strong>on</strong>tinuous<br />

length. The track circuit is split into individual track circuits, each <strong>on</strong>e c<strong>on</strong>trolling<br />

the same final TPR. They are indicated as <strong>on</strong>e track circuit <strong>on</strong> the signalman’s<br />

panel. Special care must be taken where an individual secti<strong>on</strong> of such a track<br />

circuit is used separately for c<strong>on</strong>trol purposes (eg. level crossing timing).<br />

The cascading of cut secti<strong>on</strong>s (ie. c<strong>on</strong>trolling the feed to a track circuit by the<br />

relay of the next track circuit) is not permitted. The individual cut secti<strong>on</strong>s should<br />

be either returned individually to the interlocking or summated in the TPR lineside<br />

circuit or, in the case of SSI, summated in the data.<br />

Cut secti<strong>on</strong>s must be identified in accordance with GK/RT0009 (ie. AA1, AA2,<br />

AA3, etc) in the directi<strong>on</strong> of normal running. The two porti<strong>on</strong>s of a centre fed<br />

jointless track circuit are treated separately for this purpose (eg. AA2 and AA3 in<br />

Figure D2).<br />

Figure D2<br />

(50HZ)<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

AA1 AA2 AA3 AB<br />

Relay Feed<br />

(Centre Fed)<br />

Jointless<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

AA2 AA3 AB<br />

RX<br />

AA2/3<br />

TX<br />

RX RX<br />

Where a m<strong>on</strong>itoring device is provided, it must indicate to the technician the<br />

locati<strong>on</strong> at which the failed relay/receiver is housed, irrespective of the line<br />

affected. With reference to Figure D3, an example of the labelling for an<br />

individual display would be “Loc 10 (AA2, AA3, BC2, BC3)”.<br />

AA2<br />

BC3<br />

Figure D3<br />

AA2 AA3<br />

RX RX<br />

AA3/4<br />

AA4<br />

TX RX<br />

AA3 AA4<br />

BC2 BC1<br />

BC3 BC2<br />

BC1/2<br />

BC1 BB6<br />

RX RX TX<br />

RX RX<br />

LOC. 10 LOC. 11 LOC. 12<br />

<strong>Track</strong> circuits must not c<strong>on</strong>sist of more than two n<strong>on</strong>–m<strong>on</strong>itored cut secti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

(where track circuits are centre fed, four receivers (Rxs) may be n<strong>on</strong>–<br />

m<strong>on</strong>itored).<br />

RAILTRACK D5<br />

AB1<br />

TR<br />

AB1<br />

BB6


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D6 of 20<br />

6 Operating Times<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

The m<strong>on</strong>itoring device will usually be housed at the nearest interlocking, but this<br />

will largely be governed by the routine and out–of–hours fault finding cover<br />

arrangements which exist in the vicinity.<br />

The transmissi<strong>on</strong> of informati<strong>on</strong> to the m<strong>on</strong>itoring device may be achieved by<br />

additi<strong>on</strong>al FDM channels, a low–cost FDM system approved for use in signalling<br />

or telecommunicati<strong>on</strong>s cables or direct wire circuits.<br />

6.1 Time Delays<br />

There can be significant differences between the drop–away and pick–up times<br />

of different types of track circuit, such that the rear track may register clear<br />

before the forward <strong>on</strong>e registers occupied. The detecti<strong>on</strong> of the vehicle is<br />

therefore momentarily lost, resulting in a wr<strong>on</strong>g side failure, which could permit<br />

the irregular release of vital interlocking. To overcome this, additi<strong>on</strong>al time<br />

delays must be built into the pick–up time of track repeaters, the precise<br />

requirement being dependent up<strong>on</strong> the combinati<strong>on</strong> of track circuit types<br />

involved.<br />

The indicati<strong>on</strong> circuits to the signalman may be transmitted via a TDM or FDM<br />

link. Therefore the transmissi<strong>on</strong> system reacti<strong>on</strong> times must also be c<strong>on</strong>sidered<br />

to ensure that the signalman does not observe an apparent loss of train<br />

detecti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

6.2 Operating Categories And C<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

In order to simplify the number of possible permutati<strong>on</strong>s, track circuits are<br />

assigned to operating categories as follows:<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Relay Operating Characteristics Operating Category<br />

Slow to Pick Up - Quick to Drop Away A<br />

Medium to Pick Up - Medium to Drop Away B<br />

Quick to Pick Up - Slow to Drop Away C<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Circuit Type Operating Category<br />

TI21 A<br />

UM71 (French A<br />

D.C. (all types) B<br />

Phase sensitive a.c. (50Hz, 75Hz & 83.3Hz) B<br />

Aster B<br />

Reed with adjustable track filter B<br />

Western Regi<strong>on</strong> “Quick Release” (a.c./d.c.) B<br />

Diode B<br />

Coded B<br />

GEC Alsthom High Voltage Impulse (HVI) C<br />

Reed without adjustable track filter C<br />

D6 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D7 of 20<br />

With Geographical systems, the differing combinati<strong>on</strong>s of abutting categories of<br />

track circuits need to be examined and dealt with specially, according to the<br />

original design principles. With free wired relay interlocking and SSI, they must<br />

be dealt with as follows:<br />

Category A<br />

When used with a free wired relay interlocking, these track circuits do not require<br />

a slow to pick up TPR. Therefore, the TR may be used directly in c<strong>on</strong>trols.<br />

When used with an SSI, standard track circuit data must be used.<br />

Category B<br />

When used with a free wired relay interlocking, these track circuits require <strong>on</strong>e<br />

slow to pick up TPR, in accordance with Figure D4<br />

When used with an SSI, standard track circuit data must be used.<br />

Category C and Category B abutting Category C<br />

When used with a free wired relay interlocking, these track circuits must be<br />

provided with two slow to pick up TPRs, in accordance with Figure D5. The TR<br />

and TPR must be in the same locati<strong>on</strong> case or equipment room. The T2PR<br />

must be c<strong>on</strong>trolled directly by c<strong>on</strong>tacts of both TR and TPR to prevent the drop–<br />

away of T2PR from being unnecessarily delayed whilst still achieving the delayed<br />

pick–up required.<br />

When used with an SSI, track circuit data with “extra delay” must be used.<br />

Where the time delay is achieved by relay cascade, it is important that other<br />

c<strong>on</strong>tacts of the TR and any intermediate repeater relays are not used for c<strong>on</strong>trol<br />

indicati<strong>on</strong> purposes. To prevent inadvertent subsequent use, a suitable note<br />

must be made <strong>on</strong> the C<strong>on</strong>tact Analysis Sheet.<br />

A schedule must be provided listing all TPRs, the individual secti<strong>on</strong>s repeated by<br />

each TPR and the type of track circuit (including the frequency in the case of a<br />

jointless track circuit).<br />

B50<br />

N50<br />

Figure D4<br />

B50<br />

N50<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Figure D5<br />

EG TR<br />

EG TR<br />

BR 933<br />

EG TPR<br />

RAILTRACK D7<br />

EG TR<br />

EG TR<br />

EG TPR<br />

EG TPR<br />

BR 933<br />

BR 933<br />

EG TPR<br />

EG T2PR


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D8 of 20<br />

7 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

Interrupters<br />

8 Length of <strong>Track</strong><br />

<strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

The interrupter (BRS-SM 374) is designed to be mounted <strong>on</strong> the stock rail, not<br />

the switch rail, and is electrically insulated from it. It is to be mounted as near as<br />

possible to the switch toe, at a positi<strong>on</strong> where the flangeway gap is not less than<br />

70mm when the switch is closed.<br />

An interrupter may be either directly c<strong>on</strong>trolled in series with the track circuit or<br />

part of a separate circuit utilising an interrupter relay according to circumstances.<br />

The interrupter must be part of a separate circuit unless all of the following<br />

c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s apply:<br />

• The line is n<strong>on</strong>–electrified.<br />

• The track circuit <strong>on</strong> which the interrupter is wired is a d.c. track circuit.<br />

• The operati<strong>on</strong> of a track circuit by by the interrupter will place to danger any<br />

necessary signal <strong>on</strong> adjoining lines.<br />

Note: The b<strong>on</strong>ding of the interrupter must be of opposite polarity to the rail <strong>on</strong><br />

which it is mounted.<br />

In all other circumstances, the interrupter must be part of a separate circuit<br />

incorporating a track circuit interrupter relay. The interrupter relay is c<strong>on</strong>trolled<br />

directly by the interrupter itself and its fr<strong>on</strong>t c<strong>on</strong>tacts are used to c<strong>on</strong>trol all<br />

repeat relays of the required track circuit. Where necessary, an interrupter relay<br />

may c<strong>on</strong>trol more than <strong>on</strong>e track circuit or may be c<strong>on</strong>trolled by more than <strong>on</strong>e<br />

interrupter.<br />

Minimum<br />

To cater for the l<strong>on</strong>gest wheel base vehicles, a standard minimum effective track<br />

circuit length of 18.3m must be provided for new and altered works. If this<br />

minimum length cannot be achieved, alternative safeguards must be provided,<br />

(eg. sequential clearance of the track circuits in the interlockings).<br />

Maximum<br />

The maximum lengths quoted in individual Codes of Practice within the <strong>Track</strong><br />

Circuit Handbook are based <strong>on</strong> a ballast resistance of 3Ωkm for timber<br />

sleepered track and 5Ωkm for c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepered track. If it appears likely that<br />

a track circuit will be required to operate at or near its maximum permitted<br />

length, tests should be made to ascertain whether ballast c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s etc, are<br />

satisfactory, particularly in wet weather, before the scheme design is finalised.<br />

The unpredictable effect of level crossings should also be borne in mind.<br />

On electrified lines, track circuits may have to be further restricted in length in<br />

order to limit the effects of interference from the tracti<strong>on</strong> system.<br />

Certain track circuit types require a greater minimum length due to their<br />

operating characteristics. See the relevant Code of Practice within the <strong>Track</strong><br />

Circuit Handbook<br />

D8 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

9 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Gaps<br />

and Staggered<br />

IRJs<br />

10 Selective Operati<strong>on</strong><br />

of <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

11 Bad Rail Surface<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D9 of 20<br />

It is essential that all classes of vehicle, irrespective of wheelbase arrangement,<br />

are detected by the track circuiting, otherwise false track circuit clearance may<br />

lead to premature movements of points or irregular release of signals. Based <strong>on</strong><br />

the dimensi<strong>on</strong>s of existing rolling stock and allowing for future developments, the<br />

following shall apply:<br />

a) The maximum dead secti<strong>on</strong> between two track circuits in areas of<br />

c<strong>on</strong>tinuous track circuiting is 2.6m. This is the minimum wheelbase of<br />

vehicles working unattached.<br />

b) Opposite IRJs must be regarded as the ideal arrangement. If unavoidable,<br />

physically staggered overlaps between nominally opposite IRJs must not<br />

exceed the following limits:<br />

N<strong>on</strong>–electrified areas 2.6m<br />

Electrified areas if the tracti<strong>on</strong> rails overlap 2.6m<br />

Electrified areas if the insulated rails overlap 2.1m *<br />

Isle of Wight lines 1.7m *<br />

Note*: These distances are stipulated by the Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer to<br />

prevent a motor bogie losing its negative return path (see Figure D12 for<br />

clarificati<strong>on</strong>).<br />

a) There must be at least 18.3m between the nearest joint of any physically<br />

staggered pair and an IRJ defining a clearance point at the end of the track<br />

circuit. Where this cannot be obtained, special sequential c<strong>on</strong>trols must be<br />

provided.<br />

b) If the physical stagger exceeds 1.6m, there must be at least 18.3m between<br />

the nearest joint of the staggered pair and the next IRJ. If the stagger is less<br />

than 1.6m, this distance may be reduced to 11m. Where the requirement<br />

cannot be met, special sequential c<strong>on</strong>trols must be provided.<br />

c) Full details of critical dimensi<strong>on</strong>s for train detecti<strong>on</strong> are c<strong>on</strong>tained in<br />

GK/RT0011.<br />

Operati<strong>on</strong> of a porti<strong>on</strong> of a track circuit by the selecti<strong>on</strong> of the positi<strong>on</strong>s of a set<br />

of points is not permitted. Such porti<strong>on</strong>s must be separately track circuited.<br />

At locati<strong>on</strong>s where oil film or rust is excessive, (eg. tracti<strong>on</strong> depots, terminal<br />

platform lines, etc), a stainless steel strip can be applied to the surface of the<br />

running rail by the Permanent Way Engineer. This must be shown <strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

plans, using the symbol specified in Part C. The vibrati<strong>on</strong> caused by the<br />

resulting uneven rail surface restricts its applicati<strong>on</strong> to very low speed<br />

applicati<strong>on</strong>s (5 mph maximum).<br />

Alternatively, the GEC Alsthom High Voltage Impulse (HVI) track circuit may be<br />

used (see GK/RC0756).<br />

12 Emergency<br />

Crossovers Where a crossover is clipped and padlocked or worked from an adjacent ground<br />

frame and subject <strong>on</strong>ly to an emergency release, track circuiting is not required<br />

for movements over the crossover.<br />

RAILTRACK D9


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D10 of 20<br />

13 Insulated Rail Joints<br />

and B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

13.1 Definiti<strong>on</strong> of B<strong>on</strong>ding Types<br />

When b<strong>on</strong>ding secti<strong>on</strong>s of rail together to form track circuits, equipment of<br />

differing performance has to be used depending up<strong>on</strong> the type of track circuit<br />

and the type or absence of electrificati<strong>on</strong>; eg. a jumper b<strong>on</strong>d or fishplate b<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

may vary in design depending up<strong>on</strong>:<br />

• whether or not it is part of a tracti<strong>on</strong> rail system;<br />

• whether or not it is proved intact via series b<strong>on</strong>ding.;<br />

• whether or not it is part of a n<strong>on</strong>–series “safety–through–diversity” system.<br />

In order to avoid repetiti<strong>on</strong> of b<strong>on</strong>ding equipment detail in each secti<strong>on</strong> of this<br />

handbook, a method of classifying b<strong>on</strong>ding types has been developed in which<br />

fishplate b<strong>on</strong>ding is identified separately from jumper b<strong>on</strong>ding, the ‘family tree’<br />

being shown in Figure D6.<br />

Standard<br />

Jumper<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d(ing)<br />

Figure D6<br />

Jumper<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d(ing)<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

Jumper<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d(ing)<br />

Yellow<br />

Standard<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d(ing)<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Yellow<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

B<strong>on</strong>d(ing)<br />

Standard<br />

Fishplate<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d(ing)<br />

Fishplate<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d(ing)<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

Fishplate<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d(ing)<br />

13.1.1 Fishplate B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

This type of b<strong>on</strong>ding is used to improve the reliability of the electrical c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong><br />

between pieces of rail which are already in casual electrical c<strong>on</strong>tact by virtue of<br />

their c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>. Whilst the most obvious item in this category is the un–<br />

insulated fishplate, this method of b<strong>on</strong>ding extends to elements of S & C, such<br />

as crossings, wing rails etc, where the comp<strong>on</strong>ents are also bolted together<br />

without intervening insulati<strong>on</strong>. Fishplate b<strong>on</strong>ding is not shown <strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ding plans.<br />

There are two types of this b<strong>on</strong>ding:<br />

Standard Fishplate B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Used to b<strong>on</strong>d all fishplate rail joints <strong>on</strong> n<strong>on</strong>–electrified lines and a.c. <strong>on</strong>ly<br />

electrified lines.<br />

On d.c. or dual a.c./d.c. electrified lines, this b<strong>on</strong>ding is <strong>on</strong>ly used <strong>on</strong> the<br />

insulated (signal) rail of single rail track circuits. The most comm<strong>on</strong> method is<br />

two galvanised ir<strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ds attached to the rail at each end with driven taper pins.<br />

It is installed by the Signal Engineer in all cases.<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong> Fishplate B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Used to b<strong>on</strong>d all fishplate rail joints <strong>on</strong> d.c. or dual a.c./d.c. electrified lines which<br />

form part of the tracti<strong>on</strong> current system. It is the resp<strong>on</strong>sibility of the Electric<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer.<br />

13.1.2 Jumper B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

This covers jumper cables which b<strong>on</strong>d together secti<strong>on</strong>s of rail for track circuit<br />

and/or tracti<strong>on</strong> purposes; those secti<strong>on</strong>s may themselves be formed from many<br />

D10 RAILTRACK


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D11 of 20<br />

individual pieces of rail which are b<strong>on</strong>ded together with fishplate b<strong>on</strong>ding. There<br />

are four types of jumper b<strong>on</strong>ding:<br />

Standard Jumper B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

A jumper b<strong>on</strong>d between secti<strong>on</strong>s of rail which is proved intact as part of fail–safe<br />

series b<strong>on</strong>ding and does not form any part of a tracti<strong>on</strong> current system.<br />

It is a light current cable installed by the Signal Engineer.<br />

Yellow Standard B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Used <strong>on</strong> n<strong>on</strong>–electrified lines or l<strong>on</strong>g spurs of insulated (signal) rail <strong>on</strong> electrified<br />

lines.<br />

A jumper b<strong>on</strong>d between secti<strong>on</strong>s of rail which is not proved intact by fail–safe<br />

series b<strong>on</strong>ding. Safety is assured by installing at least three alternative jumpers,<br />

such that two jumper disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s are not, by themselves, unsafe. It is a<br />

mechanically robust light current cable installed by the Signal Engineer and<br />

identified either by a yellow sheath or a yellow sleeve at its terminati<strong>on</strong>. Its<br />

mechanical strength allows its electrical integrity to be inferred from regular visual<br />

inspecti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong> Jumper B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong> rated b<strong>on</strong>ding attached to the tracti<strong>on</strong> rail of electrified lines but which is<br />

not relied up<strong>on</strong> for the integrity of track circuit operati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Yellow Tracti<strong>on</strong> B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Provided in accordance with the same design principles as Yellow Standard<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding, except that it is tracti<strong>on</strong> current rated.<br />

It is installed by the Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer (except impedance b<strong>on</strong>d end<br />

c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s which are c<strong>on</strong>nected by the Signal Engineer).<br />

13.2 Design Principles for Yellow B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

The design principles whereby the need for yellow b<strong>on</strong>ding is identified are the<br />

same for both n<strong>on</strong>–electrified and electrified lines. Electrificati<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong>ly affects the<br />

rating of b<strong>on</strong>d to be installed and the organisati<strong>on</strong> resp<strong>on</strong>sible for its installati<strong>on</strong><br />

and subsequent maintenance.<br />

Yellow b<strong>on</strong>ding shall ensure that a single or double disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> will not result<br />

in an unsafe c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>. See GK/RT 0252.<br />

13.2.1 Yellow B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Where separate secti<strong>on</strong>s of rail are required to be electrically interc<strong>on</strong>nected in<br />

parallel, each secti<strong>on</strong> is to be b<strong>on</strong>ded to the adjacent secti<strong>on</strong> at each point of<br />

abutment using a yellow b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

Each spur extremity is to be b<strong>on</strong>ded to another part of the same electrically<br />

comm<strong>on</strong> network, which is not itself a part of the same spur, using a yellow<br />

b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

In additi<strong>on</strong> to any switch reinforcement yellow b<strong>on</strong>d, each secti<strong>on</strong> must have at<br />

least three yellow b<strong>on</strong>ds attached to it in different physical locati<strong>on</strong>s, which<br />

should be a minimum of 20m apart. Additi<strong>on</strong>al yellow b<strong>on</strong>ds are to be installed<br />

to achieve this and, wherever possible, the additi<strong>on</strong>al b<strong>on</strong>ds must c<strong>on</strong>nect to a<br />

different secti<strong>on</strong> from those already fitted.<br />

In the case of n<strong>on</strong>–electrified multiple track plain line, the comm<strong>on</strong> rails of parallel<br />

tracks must be cross b<strong>on</strong>ded together using yellow b<strong>on</strong>ds at the site of<br />

feed/relay ends and at least 1km intervals.<br />

Yellow b<strong>on</strong>ds are to be clearly identified <strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ding plans as shown in Part C.<br />

RAILTRACK D11


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D12 of 20<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Examples of the applicati<strong>on</strong> of this principle are shown in Figure D7.<br />

Figure D7<br />

Other Yellow B<strong>on</strong>ds<br />

Y Y Y<br />

Switch Reinforcement Yellow B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

D12 RAILTRACK<br />

Y<br />

13.2.2 Switch Reinforcement Yellow B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Wherever the rail designated to require yellow b<strong>on</strong>ding passes through a set of<br />

point switches, its c<strong>on</strong>tinuity is to be strengthened by a “Yellow B<strong>on</strong>d” as shown<br />

in Figure D8. Installati<strong>on</strong> for tracti<strong>on</strong> rails is the resp<strong>on</strong>sibility of the Electric<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer, and for n<strong>on</strong>–tracti<strong>on</strong> rails is that of the the Signal Engineer.<br />

Figure D8<br />

Comm<strong>on</strong> Rail Through Points<br />

13.3 B<strong>on</strong>ding C<strong>on</strong>figurati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

In order to avoid repetiti<strong>on</strong> whilst clearly identifying requirements, it is useful to<br />

define the four b<strong>on</strong>ding c<strong>on</strong>figurati<strong>on</strong>s and associated b<strong>on</strong>ding standards which<br />

can be used for particular cases:<br />

13.3.1 DRDS (Double Rail/Double Series)<br />

This is where each track circuit is fully isolated from its neighbours by IRJs in<br />

both rails or tuned z<strong>on</strong>es and each rail of the track circuit is series b<strong>on</strong>ded<br />

OR<br />

Y<br />

Y


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D13 of 20<br />

throughout except for permissible spurs (see 13.4). In electrified areas, there<br />

are no other electrificati<strong>on</strong> related b<strong>on</strong>ds from either rail other than via the centre<br />

c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> of impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds.<br />

N<strong>on</strong>–electrified Lines - Standard jumper b<strong>on</strong>ds to both running rails.<br />

Electrified Lines - Tracti<strong>on</strong> jumper b<strong>on</strong>ds to both running rails.<br />

13.3.2 DRSS (Double Rail/Single Series)<br />

This is where each track circuit is fully isolated from its neighbours by IRJs in<br />

both rails, and <strong>on</strong>e rail of the track circuit is series b<strong>on</strong>ded throughout except for<br />

permissible spurs (see 13.4). The other rail of the track circuit c<strong>on</strong>tains elements<br />

of parallel b<strong>on</strong>ding.<br />

N<strong>on</strong>–electrified Lines - Standard jumper b<strong>on</strong>ds to the series b<strong>on</strong>ded<br />

rail and to the true series b<strong>on</strong>ded elements of<br />

the other rail.<br />

Electrified Lines - Not applicable<br />

Yellow standard b<strong>on</strong>ds to interc<strong>on</strong>nect the<br />

parallel elements.<br />

13.3.3 CR Class (Comm<strong>on</strong> Rail)<br />

This is where each track circuit is isolated from its neighbours by IRJs in <strong>on</strong>e rail<br />

<strong>on</strong>ly (the signal rail), and that rail is series b<strong>on</strong>ded except for permissible spurs<br />

(see 13.4). The other rail is electrically comm<strong>on</strong> with adjacent track circuits and<br />

may have parallel b<strong>on</strong>ded elements, but does not carry tracti<strong>on</strong> current.<br />

N<strong>on</strong>-electrified Lines<br />

b<strong>on</strong>ded<br />

- Standard jumper b<strong>on</strong>ds to the series<br />

Signal Rail.<br />

Yellow standard b<strong>on</strong>ds to the comm<strong>on</strong> rail.<br />

Electrified Lines<br />

13.3.4 SR (Single Rail)<br />

- Not Applicable<br />

This is where each track circuit is isolated from its neighbours by IRJs in <strong>on</strong>e rail<br />

<strong>on</strong>ly (the signal rail), and that rail is series b<strong>on</strong>ded except for permissible spurs<br />

(see 13.4). The other rail is electrically comm<strong>on</strong> with adjacent track circuits and<br />

forms part of a mesh carrying tracti<strong>on</strong> current.<br />

N<strong>on</strong>–electrified Lines - Not applicable<br />

Electrified Lines<br />

13.4 Permissible Spurs<br />

- Standard jumper b<strong>on</strong>ds to the signal rail.<br />

Yellow tracti<strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ds to the tracti<strong>on</strong> rail.<br />

This clause covers the permissible arrangements for parallel b<strong>on</strong>ded spur<br />

secti<strong>on</strong>s of an otherwise series b<strong>on</strong>ded track circuit secti<strong>on</strong>. Parallel b<strong>on</strong>ded<br />

spurs <strong>on</strong> comm<strong>on</strong>/tracti<strong>on</strong> rail secti<strong>on</strong>s are not separately identified, since they<br />

are covered by the general requirements for b<strong>on</strong>ding of such rails.<br />

Spurs up to 13m, measured from the first joint or weld of a crossing, shall be<br />

permitted as shown in Figure D9. provided that there is a maximum of <strong>on</strong>e<br />

fishplated joint between the series b<strong>on</strong>ded rail and the end of the spur, and that<br />

this joint is properly b<strong>on</strong>ded.<br />

Spurs up to a maximum of 60m, measured from the first joint or weld of a<br />

crossing, shall be permitted, provided they are yellow b<strong>on</strong>ded to the parent<br />

series rail.<br />

RAILTRACK D13


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D14 of 20<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Only One B<strong>on</strong>ded Fishplate Joint Permitted<br />

13 METRES MAX.<br />

If X Or Y >13m Then Additi<strong>on</strong>al Cross B<strong>on</strong>ds To The Stock Rails Will Be Required<br />

Figure D9<br />

D14 RAILTRACK<br />

Y<br />

X<br />

13.5 Series B<strong>on</strong>ding Simplificati<strong>on</strong><br />

If series b<strong>on</strong>ding becomes complex, it imposes penalties <strong>on</strong> both reliability and<br />

maintenance. The opti<strong>on</strong> of cut secti<strong>on</strong>s should then be c<strong>on</strong>sidered. A<br />

maximum of four point ends or fifteen IRJs (including boundary joints) per track<br />

circuit is str<strong>on</strong>gly recommended.<br />

13.6 Applicati<strong>on</strong>s of B<strong>on</strong>ding C<strong>on</strong>figurati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Type of<br />

<strong>Track</strong><br />

N<strong>on</strong>–electrified<br />

Lines<br />

A.C. Electrified<br />

Lines<br />

D.C. Electrified<br />

Lines<br />

Plain Line DRDS or CR DRDS or SR DRDS or SR♣<br />

S & C DRSS * SR SR<br />

Complex<br />

S & C<br />

Figure D10<br />

Notes:<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

CR # SR SR<br />

* Where DRDS is impracticable.<br />

# Where DRDS and DRSS are impracticable.<br />

♣ Maximum permitted length is 200m.<br />

13.7 IRJs Between Differing <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Types<br />

IRJs must be provided in both running rails at the point where differing track<br />

circuit types abut. Special cases will be discussed in the relevant secti<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

13.8 IRJs at Signals<br />

Where a signal is replaced to danger by occupati<strong>on</strong> of the first track circuit<br />

ahead, the IRJs will generally be positi<strong>on</strong>ed between 5m - 20m bey<strong>on</strong>d the<br />

signal. For further informati<strong>on</strong> see SSP 62.<br />

13.9 Jointed <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> Abutting N<strong>on</strong>–track Circuited Line<br />

In order to detect defective IRJs where a jointed track circuit adjoins a n<strong>on</strong>–track<br />

circuited secti<strong>on</strong>, a short circuit b<strong>on</strong>d must be provided immediately bey<strong>on</strong>d the<br />

IRJs, as shown in Figure D11. This b<strong>on</strong>d shall be a standard b<strong>on</strong>d <strong>on</strong> n<strong>on</strong>–<br />

electrified lines, or a tracti<strong>on</strong> standard b<strong>on</strong>d <strong>on</strong> electrified lines.


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Figure D11<br />

AA<br />

13.10 IRJs at Electrified/N<strong>on</strong>–electrified Boundary<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D15 of 20<br />

13.10.1 Running Lines<br />

At the boundary between electrified and n<strong>on</strong>–electrified lines, initial isolati<strong>on</strong> IRJs<br />

must be provided in both running rails at a sufficient distance bey<strong>on</strong>d the end of<br />

the catenary/c<strong>on</strong>ductor rail to prevent an overrunning train from injecting tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

current into the rails <strong>on</strong> the n<strong>on</strong>–electrified side of the joints. The collector<br />

shoes <strong>on</strong> d.c. multiple units are interc<strong>on</strong>nected within each multiple unit set.<br />

Therefore, it is the length of the l<strong>on</strong>gest multiple unit which will dictate the<br />

positi<strong>on</strong> of the initial isolati<strong>on</strong> IRJs in d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> areas.<br />

All track circuits within 800m of the initial isolati<strong>on</strong> IRJs <strong>on</strong> the n<strong>on</strong>–electrified side<br />

must be immune to the tracti<strong>on</strong> system and provided with double rail IRJs.<br />

Where there are no track circuits <strong>on</strong> the n<strong>on</strong>–electrified side of the initial isolati<strong>on</strong><br />

IRJs, a sec<strong>on</strong>d set of isolati<strong>on</strong> IRJs must be provided in each rail 800m bey<strong>on</strong>d<br />

the initial isolati<strong>on</strong> IRJs.<br />

If any siding occurs within the above 800m areas, a sec<strong>on</strong>d set of isolati<strong>on</strong> IRJs<br />

must be provided in each rail of the siding immediately clear of the running line.<br />

13.10.2 Sidings Off Electrified Lines<br />

In electrified tracti<strong>on</strong> areas, two sets of IRJs are to be provided in both rails at<br />

least 27m apart. These are to be provided bey<strong>on</strong>d the last track circuit in private<br />

sidings leading to stores or depots c<strong>on</strong>taining flammable or explosive<br />

substances, and in other sidings where isolati<strong>on</strong> from electric tracti<strong>on</strong> is required.<br />

In d.c. electrified areas, the tracti<strong>on</strong> return b<strong>on</strong>ding must be extended by the<br />

Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer <strong>on</strong>to track circuited n<strong>on</strong>–electrified lines and sidings<br />

for at least 120m bey<strong>on</strong>d the c<strong>on</strong>ductor rail or the tips of the points. <strong>Track</strong><br />

circuits bey<strong>on</strong>d this distance must be fully isolated with double rail IRJ’s or the<br />

tracti<strong>on</strong> return b<strong>on</strong>ding must be c<strong>on</strong>tinued for at least another 335m. This<br />

ensures that an electric tracti<strong>on</strong> unit inadvertently entering a n<strong>on</strong>–electrified area<br />

will not lose its negative return whilst any shoe is still in c<strong>on</strong>tact with a c<strong>on</strong>ductor<br />

rail.<br />

On lines where Eurostar operati<strong>on</strong>s are authorised, the above distances will<br />

need to be extended accordingly.<br />

If the line c<strong>on</strong>cerned c<strong>on</strong>nects with a d.c. electrified line at more than <strong>on</strong>e point,<br />

it must have c<strong>on</strong>tinuous tracti<strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ding throughout in order to prevent tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

return current passing through the couplings of a train which is bridging two<br />

tracti<strong>on</strong> porti<strong>on</strong>s of a siding.<br />

13.11 A.C. and D.C. Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Areas Abutting<br />

Where there is a requirement for inter–running with trains operating <strong>on</strong> differing<br />

electrificati<strong>on</strong> systems, IRJ separati<strong>on</strong> between the differing tracti<strong>on</strong> systems<br />

cannot generally be achieved. In these areas, a suitable “buffer” z<strong>on</strong>e of dual<br />

immunisati<strong>on</strong> must be provided.<br />

As a general guide, for track circuit applicati<strong>on</strong>s, immunisati<strong>on</strong> against 50Hz<br />

electrificati<strong>on</strong> should be maintained for a distance of 3km bey<strong>on</strong>d the extremity<br />

RAILTRACK D15


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D16 of 20<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

of the 50Hz system. Immunisati<strong>on</strong> of track circuits <strong>on</strong> the a.c. electrified system<br />

and n<strong>on</strong>-electrified lines against d.c. interference, will usually involve significantly<br />

greater distances (up to 20 km).<br />

The extent of such a z<strong>on</strong>e is dependent up<strong>on</strong> track layout, positi<strong>on</strong> of feeder<br />

stati<strong>on</strong>s and tracti<strong>on</strong> load etc, and requires specialist assessment and<br />

subsequent verificati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

13.12 Buffer Stops<br />

Rail mounted buffer stops in double rail track circuited areas must be fully<br />

insulated. In the case of single rail track circuits in a.c. electrified territory, they<br />

should be insulated from the signal rail.<br />

The type of IRJ provided close to buffer stops must be of a design which offers<br />

similar tensile strength to c<strong>on</strong>venti<strong>on</strong>al steel fishplates (see GK/RT0031).<br />

13.13 Electrical Stagger<br />

Where the electrical energy of <strong>on</strong>e track circuit is capable of operating the<br />

adjacent track circuit due to IRJ failure, the polarity (d.c.) or phase (a.c.) of each<br />

must be arranged so that they oppose rather than reinforce each other. The<br />

intent being that IRJ failure will not result in false operati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

The following methods are available to counteract lack of proper electrical<br />

stagger:<br />

• Provide an additi<strong>on</strong>al transpositi<strong>on</strong> to restore correct electrical stagger.<br />

• Abut feed ends.<br />

• Provide a feed end relay (d.c. track circuits <strong>on</strong>ly).<br />

• C<strong>on</strong>vert <strong>on</strong>e track circuit to a n<strong>on</strong>–interfering form of energy.<br />

13.14 Fouling and Clearance Points<br />

Where tracks cross or diverge etc, it is necessary to define track circuit limit<br />

dimensi<strong>on</strong>s which ensure that traffic passing al<strong>on</strong>g <strong>on</strong>e route is not obstructed<br />

by vehicles standing <strong>on</strong> the other. The two critical dimensi<strong>on</strong>s are referred to as<br />

the fouling point and the clearance point, as shown in Figure D12.<br />

Figure D12<br />

1970mm (Between Running Edges)<br />

4880 MM<br />

Crossing Nose Fouling Point Clearance Point<br />

D16 RAILTRACK


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D17 of 20<br />

13.14.1 Fouling Point<br />

This is a positi<strong>on</strong> a short distance away from the point of running line divergence<br />

(crossing nose). Should any part of a vehicle <strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong>e track be between the<br />

crossing nose and the fouling point, it will make physical c<strong>on</strong>tact with any<br />

vehicles passing <strong>on</strong> the other route.<br />

Where the angle of divergence is less than 45°, the fouling point occurs where<br />

the distance between the running edges of the two rails is 1970mm, measured<br />

at right angles from the track for which the fouling point is being determined.<br />

Where the angle of divergence is greater than 45°, the fouling point occurs at<br />

1970mm from the crossing nose, measured al<strong>on</strong>g the track for which the<br />

clearance point is being determined.<br />

In the case where tracks become parallel with a running edge separati<strong>on</strong> of less<br />

than 1970mm, the fouling point occurs where the tracks first become parallel.<br />

13.14.2 Clearance Point<br />

As track circuits detect the wheelsets of vehicles which are inboard of bodyshell<br />

limits, the boundary of any track circuit designed to give assurance of clear<br />

passage al<strong>on</strong>g the other route must be some distance bey<strong>on</strong>d the actual fouling<br />

point. This is defined as the clearance point.<br />

In the absence of protecting trap points, the clearance point is 4880mm further<br />

from the crossing nose than the fouling point. Where trap points are provided,<br />

the clearance point is defined as the switch tips of the trap points. In both<br />

cases, the IRJ defining the track circuit limit is positi<strong>on</strong>ed at the first suitable rail<br />

joint bey<strong>on</strong>d the clearance point. All clearance points shall be shown <strong>on</strong> the<br />

b<strong>on</strong>ding plans.<br />

13.14.3 Minimum Length of <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

To prevent a vehicle bridging a short track circuit and c<strong>on</strong>sequently providing a<br />

false clear c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>, the minimum length of a track circuit is 18.3m.<br />

13.14.4 Staggered IRJs<br />

Where practical, IRJs should be positi<strong>on</strong>ed in each rail so that they are opposite<br />

to each other. Where a physical stagger between opposite IRJs is unavoidable,<br />

the maximum physical stagger must not exceed 2.6m. This is the minimum<br />

wheelbase of vehicles which can work unattached.<br />

To ensure that motor bogies do not become insulated from the tracti<strong>on</strong> return<br />

path, the physical stagger for a signal rail overlap in electric tracti<strong>on</strong> areas must<br />

not exceed 2.1m. On the Isle of Wight, vehicles used have smaller bogies and<br />

as such, the maximum physical stagger is reduced to 1.7m.<br />

In order to avoid loss of detecti<strong>on</strong> of a single car, four wheel vehicle, the<br />

permitted distance between inner joints of staggered pairs of IRJs must not be<br />

less than 11m, where the IRJs are staggered at a distance of less than 1.6m<br />

(the minimum bogie wheelbase). If however, either pair of IRJs are staggered at<br />

a distance greater than 1.6m, or provide a clearance point (see Clause 13.14.2),<br />

then the distance between inner joints of staggered pairs must be not less than<br />

the 18.3m minimum track circuit length.<br />

Note: When c<strong>on</strong>sulting other documents, care should be taken to ascertain<br />

whether “running edges” or “outside edges” of rails are being referred to.<br />

RAILTRACK D17


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D18 of 20<br />

Notes <strong>on</strong> Figure D13:<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Figure D13 gives examples of the applicati<strong>on</strong> criteria for IRJs, the references<br />

being as follows:<br />

13.15 RJ Summary<br />

C Clearance for vehicle overhang. Not less than 4880mm from the fouling point to the IRJ.<br />

D Distance between inner joints of<br />

staggered pairs.<br />

E Distance between staggered<br />

pair and end of track circuit.<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Not less than 11m if both of pairs staggered < 1.6m.<br />

Otherwise, not less than 18.3m.<br />

18.3m minimum.<br />

F Fouling point. 1970mm between running edges<br />

L Minimum effective length<br />

of track circuit.<br />

18.3m minimum<br />

S Physical Stagger 1.7m max: Isle of Wight lines <strong>on</strong>ly.<br />

2.1m max: Signal rail overlap <strong>on</strong> electrified lines.<br />

2.6 max: Other cases.<br />

Figure D13<br />

D18 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

14 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

Equipment<br />

Positi<strong>on</strong>ing<br />

15 Layout and Wiring<br />

of Lineside Apparatus<br />

Housing Equipment<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D19 of 20<br />

13.16 Permanent Way Engineering C<strong>on</strong>siderati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

The following should be c<strong>on</strong>sidered relative to IRJ provisi<strong>on</strong> in S & C as<br />

c<strong>on</strong>strained by permanent way engineering c<strong>on</strong>siderati<strong>on</strong>s:<br />

• IRJs adjacent to cast crossings should be avoided wherever possible.<br />

• IRJs run over in the high speed route should be avoided as far as possible.<br />

• There should be a minimum distance of 200mm between chair or rail<br />

fastenings of opposite polarity/phase to reduce the probability of failures due<br />

to metallic litter, etc.<br />

With a view to obtaining the best possible performance, track circuit equipment<br />

should be positi<strong>on</strong>ed as close as practicably possible to the associated rail<br />

c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s, and any maximum limits laid down in the individual track circuit<br />

secti<strong>on</strong>s must not be exceeded. This also permits better communicati<strong>on</strong><br />

between technicians when working apart, undertaking drop shunt tests, etc.<br />

In tunnels and <strong>on</strong> viaducts, the feed and relay ends of a track circuit should be<br />

mounted in the same lineside apparatus housing, provided that no electrical<br />

parameters are infringed.<br />

If the design of track circuit is such that staff are not required to make<br />

adjustments (eg. HVI track circuits), the relay or receiver equipment may be<br />

grouped in equipment buildings provided that no electrical parameters are<br />

thereby infringed.<br />

Disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> boxes may be provided if site c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s warrant. These must be<br />

shown <strong>on</strong> wiring diagrams, but are not required <strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ding plans unless they<br />

c<strong>on</strong>tain fuses or arresters.<br />

All relays should be mounted as near to the top of the lineside apparatus<br />

housing as possible.<br />

Tail cables are to be terminated at the bottom of the lineside apparatus housing<br />

in <strong>on</strong>e of the following manners, as appropriate:<br />

• Directly <strong>on</strong>to the track fuse and link.<br />

• Directly <strong>on</strong>to the track fuses.<br />

• Directly <strong>on</strong>to two links.<br />

• Directly <strong>on</strong>to a surge arrestor.<br />

In d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> areas where the lineside apparatus housing is remote from the<br />

track c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s, the surge arrester (where provided) and track fuse must be<br />

located at the tail cable terminati<strong>on</strong>s nearest to the rail c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

Where special restricti<strong>on</strong>s apply to wiring and/or positi<strong>on</strong>ing of equipment, this<br />

must be clearly shown <strong>on</strong> all wiring/layout drawings, so that if any alterati<strong>on</strong>s are<br />

made at a later date, the restricti<strong>on</strong>s are readily apparent<br />

RAILTRACK D19


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page D20 of 20<br />

16 Duplicate Rail<br />

C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

17 Communicati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Duplicate c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s to the rails are the preferred arrangement for all track<br />

circuits, except those which operate at audio frequencies (see the relevant<br />

secti<strong>on</strong>s for further informati<strong>on</strong>).<br />

Where duplicate c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s are used the method of wiring is as shown in Part<br />

E.<br />

It is desirable that communicati<strong>on</strong> circuits are available between the<br />

feed/transmitter and relay/receiver sites to facilitate setting up and fault<br />

finding.The communicati<strong>on</strong> circuits may be run in the same multicore cables as<br />

the feed, transmitter, relay or receiver circuits.<br />

At certain SSI installati<strong>on</strong>s, the data cables carry communicati<strong>on</strong> cores which<br />

may be used for this purpose.<br />

D20 RAILTRACK


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong><br />

2 Resp<strong>on</strong>sibilities for<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding Installati<strong>on</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Part E<br />

Comp<strong>on</strong>ents and Installati<strong>on</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E1 of 52<br />

This part explains the general comp<strong>on</strong>ents applicable to all track circuits.<br />

Comp<strong>on</strong>ents specific to a particular type of track circuit are listed in the relevant<br />

Approved Code of Practice within this handbook.<br />

Installati<strong>on</strong> procedures for individual track circuit types are detailed in the<br />

relevant Approved Code of Practice within this handbook.<br />

Note: The Catalogue Numbers shown within this document are not directly<br />

c<strong>on</strong>trolled by Railtrack and as such, will not be maintained and kept up to date.<br />

Although every effort has been made to ensure that these were correct at the<br />

time of publicati<strong>on</strong>, it is therefore recommended that your supplier is c<strong>on</strong>tacted<br />

and a check is made with regard to the accuracy of these catalogue numbers<br />

prior to use.<br />

The Signal Engineer is resp<strong>on</strong>sible for:<br />

a) All fishplate b<strong>on</strong>ds in n<strong>on</strong>–tracti<strong>on</strong> return rails.<br />

b) All fishplate b<strong>on</strong>ds in tracti<strong>on</strong> return rails of a.c. <strong>on</strong>ly electrified areas.<br />

c) The positi<strong>on</strong> of all IRJs.<br />

d) All jumper b<strong>on</strong>ds between separate secti<strong>on</strong>s of n<strong>on</strong>–tracti<strong>on</strong> rails.<br />

e) In a.c. electrified areas (excluding the former Southern Regi<strong>on</strong>), all rail to<br />

impedance b<strong>on</strong>d c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s and c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s between impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds <strong>on</strong><br />

the same track.<br />

f) In dual and d.c. electrified areas (excluding the former Southern Regi<strong>on</strong>), the<br />

resp<strong>on</strong>sibility for impedance b<strong>on</strong>d c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s is subject to special<br />

arrangements between the Signal and Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineers.<br />

g) All track circuit rail c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

h) The insulati<strong>on</strong> of all rods c<strong>on</strong>nected to the rails and switches (eg. detecti<strong>on</strong>,<br />

facing point lock, point main drive and supplementary drives).<br />

The Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer is resp<strong>on</strong>sible for:<br />

a) All rail joint b<strong>on</strong>ds in d.c. or dual a.c./d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> return rails.<br />

b) All jumper b<strong>on</strong>ds between separate secti<strong>on</strong>s of tracti<strong>on</strong> return rails and<br />

between the centre c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> of impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds in different tracks.<br />

c) On the former Southern Regi<strong>on</strong>, rail to impedance b<strong>on</strong>d c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s for<br />

tracti<strong>on</strong> purposes.<br />

d) All other permanent tracti<strong>on</strong> related b<strong>on</strong>ding.<br />

The Permanent Way Engineer is resp<strong>on</strong>sible for:<br />

a) The insulati<strong>on</strong> of all point soleplates, tiebars and stretcher bars.<br />

b) The installati<strong>on</strong> of all IRJs.<br />

The requirements and resp<strong>on</strong>sibilities for the installati<strong>on</strong> of b<strong>on</strong>ding <strong>on</strong> electrified<br />

lines are laid down in GM/TT0126 and GM/TT0129.<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 1


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E2 of 52<br />

3 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

Interrupters<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

The standard insulated track circuit interrupter assembly is shown <strong>on</strong> drawing<br />

BRS-SM 374, an extract of which is shown in Figure B11.<br />

Catalogue numbers are as follows:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Assembly complete to BRS-SM 374 : 86/44001<br />

Taper pin, BRS-SM 411, 60mm : 86/44011<br />

Body unit to BRS-SM 375 : 86/44003<br />

Insulati<strong>on</strong>s to BRS-SM 376 : 55/27570<br />

Item 1 Insulating bush : 55/25976<br />

Item 2 Insulating washer : 55/28981<br />

Item 3 Channel insulati<strong>on</strong> : 55/27201<br />

The interrupter is mounted <strong>on</strong> the stock rail, not the switch rail, by means of an<br />

M20 insulated bolt passing through a 28mm hole in the rail web. A sec<strong>on</strong>d<br />

28mm hole, 130mm from the first, may be provided to enable the wiring to be<br />

brought out towards the sleeper ends. The interrupter is positi<strong>on</strong>ed as near as<br />

possible to the switch toe, commensurate with maintaining a flangeway gap of<br />

not less than 70mm with the switch closed. Figure E1 gives the nominal<br />

positi<strong>on</strong>ing.<br />

The temporary repair of track circuit interrupters by means of wrapping the cable<br />

around the stock rail is forbidden. Refer also to Part D.<br />

POSITION OF INTERRUPTER<br />

E 2 R A I L T R A C K<br />

A<br />

Rail Type Switch Type Dimensi<strong>on</strong> 'A'(mm)<br />

95 lb.Bullhead A 4180<br />

B 4780<br />

C 5900<br />

D 7620<br />

113 lb. Inclined A 4180<br />

B 4955<br />

C 6675<br />

D 7635<br />

E 10185<br />

113 lb. Vertical A 4705<br />

B 6125<br />

C 6835<br />

D 8255<br />

E 11095<br />

Figure E1


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E3 of 52<br />

4 Identificati<strong>on</strong> of<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

Boundaries Where required, a plate may be fixed to the sleepers or to the lineside track<br />

circuit equipment to assist identificati<strong>on</strong> of track circuit limits.<br />

5 Protecti<strong>on</strong> of<br />

Cross <strong>Track</strong><br />

Cables<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Wherever a track circuit boundary occurs in a tunnel, a plate bearing the track<br />

circuit name or number must be fixed to the tunnel wall <strong>on</strong> each side of the IRJ<br />

(or equivalent in the case of a jointless track circuit).<br />

5.1 <str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g><br />

Cross track tail cables and jumpers should be protected from damage, eg. by<br />

means of orange plastic pipe. This protecti<strong>on</strong> need not be c<strong>on</strong>tinuous across the<br />

cess or six–foot, but should be used where tail cables pass under walkways.<br />

5.2 Orange Pipe Installati<strong>on</strong><br />

Cut the pipes to length so that the ends are clear of the ballast shoulder. This<br />

helps to prevent ballast from entering. Restrict each pipe length to 3 metres<br />

maximum as l<strong>on</strong>g lengths of pipe will not move out of the way if struck by a<br />

tamper tine. However, in S & C areas it may be necessary to use l<strong>on</strong>ger lengths<br />

to give full protecti<strong>on</strong> across the sleeper bay. It is particularly important that the<br />

pipe is laid straight and centrally in the sleeper bay, and that holes for rail leads<br />

are as close to the rail as possible, in order to give maximum protecti<strong>on</strong> from<br />

tamping machines.<br />

Do not use the ballast to restrain sideways movement. Dig the pipe into a<br />

shallow depressi<strong>on</strong> in the ballast keep it visible but allow sideways movement if<br />

struck.<br />

Do not fill a pipe more than half full with cables. This reduces the chance of cable<br />

damage if the pipe is crushed by a tamper. If more cables have to be run,<br />

provide another pipe.<br />

Wherever possible, do not install a pipe in a sleeper bay adjacent to c<strong>on</strong>ductor<br />

rail ramped end to prevent the pipe being ignited by sparks from the collector<br />

shoe.<br />

To allow the Permanent Way Engineer maximum opportunity for tamping, do not<br />

positi<strong>on</strong> a pipe:<br />

• in a bay where there is a rail joint or weld, or in a bay adjacent to them;<br />

• in a bay which is less than 0.37 metres (1 foot 3 inches) wide, unless there<br />

is no other choice;<br />

• in a bay which already has an orange pipe or other obstructi<strong>on</strong>, or in <strong>on</strong>e<br />

adjacent to it. Always leave at least <strong>on</strong>e clear bay between obstructed bays.<br />

If a pipe needs side holes for the exit of track c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> cables:<br />

a) Cut the holes with a good quality 40 to 50 mm fixed diameter hole saw. Do<br />

not use other methods of making holes. Round off the sharp edges of the<br />

hole with a file or deburring tool.<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 3


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E4 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

b) Clip the pipe to the foot of the outside of flat bottom rail. On bull-head rail a<br />

cab-lock round the pipe may be secured to the rail web with a taper pin.<br />

These fixings prevent the pipe rotating or moving al<strong>on</strong>g its length and cutting<br />

into the cable. The clip will still permit some sideways movement if the pipe is<br />

struck.<br />

c) Leave sufficient slack in the cable so that if the pipe does become detached<br />

from the rail, the c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> will not be pulled away. However, excessive<br />

amounts of slack cable should be avoided in order to minimise the likelihood<br />

of vandalism.<br />

Orange pipe must not be cut al<strong>on</strong>g its length unless special dispensati<strong>on</strong> has<br />

been given.<br />

Orange pipe must not be used in tunnels or other areas of restricted Ventilati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

If the pipe does ignite, it is difficult to extinguish and gives off heavy fumes.<br />

Orange pipe is generally suitable as protecti<strong>on</strong> for crossing walkways if it is let<br />

into the surface. When tail cables need to be protected for other reas<strong>on</strong>s, such<br />

as chemical spillage in sidings or for staff safety, a c<strong>on</strong>crete route or under track<br />

buried crossing should be used.<br />

Catalogue numbers are given in clause E11.<br />

E 4 R A I L T R A C K


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E5 of 52<br />

Figure E2 shows the general arrangement for orange pipe installati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Leave some slack here<br />

to allow for minor slews.<br />

Dis<br />

Box<br />

Rail web<br />

pipe clip<br />

Orange pipe<br />

Cable strap<br />

(use as few as possible)<br />

No rail web<br />

pipe clip<br />

Orange pipe<br />

No rail web<br />

pipe clip<br />

Cable route<br />

Note Dis Boxes should be mounted in a permanent Green Z<strong>on</strong>e as defined in<br />

GO/RT3073.<br />

Figure E2<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 5


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E6 of 52<br />

6 Mechanised <strong>Track</strong><br />

Maintenance<br />

7 Rail Drilling<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

All equipment <strong>on</strong> the track must be installed clear of the tamping z<strong>on</strong>es indicated<br />

in Figure E3, except cross track orange pipe.<br />

All sleepers may be tamped, except those <strong>on</strong> either side of Silec treadles and<br />

point rodding.<br />

Figure E3<br />

E 6 R A I L T R A C K<br />

290<br />

405<br />

Tamping Z<strong>on</strong>e<br />

For c<strong>on</strong>venti<strong>on</strong>al grades of rail steel, Signal Engineers use rail drilling machines.<br />

They are preset to drill the two holes required accurately with no adjustment<br />

necessary. Available drilling machines and attachments, together with the<br />

Catalogue Numbers, are listed below:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Rail b<strong>on</strong>d drilling machine, hand operated (single spindle) : 39/41822 *<br />

Rail b<strong>on</strong>d drilling machine, 110V/500W (twin spindle) : 86/43690 #<br />

Rail b<strong>on</strong>d drilling machine, petrol engine (twin spindle) : 39/41823 *<br />

S & C drilling attachment, for use with 39/41823 : 39/200000<br />

Flexible drive, 8 feet l<strong>on</strong>g, for use with 39/41823 : 39/54510<br />

Notes:<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

* The drilling machine fits over the rail and cannot be left in positi<strong>on</strong> whilst<br />

trains pass.<br />

# The drilling machine clamps to the underside of the rail and can be left in<br />

positi<strong>on</strong> whilst trains pass.<br />

At sites of heavy wear, particularly in S & C, The Permanent Way Engineer may<br />

fit specially hardened steel rails which can <strong>on</strong>ly be drilled with special drill bits.<br />

Whilst the Permanent Way Engineer permits drilling of 7.2mm holes for taper<br />

pins by Signal Engineers, drilling of larger holes in hardened steel is a specialist<br />

job to be undertaken by Permanent Way Engineering staff.<br />

405<br />

290


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

8 Rail C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E7 of 52<br />

The following table of Permanent Way Engineer’s rail markings is included to<br />

assist staff in the identificati<strong>on</strong> of rail types. The brand marks appear as raised<br />

characters <strong>on</strong> the rail web; c<strong>on</strong>firmati<strong>on</strong> is also provided by paint marks <strong>on</strong> new<br />

rail and (in some cases) by its magnetic properties.<br />

Remarks:<br />

Figure E4<br />

Type Brand Mark Paint Marks Magnetic Remarks<br />

Normal N<strong>on</strong>e N<strong>on</strong>e Yes 1<br />

Wear resisting A A 2 blue Yes 1<br />

Wear resisting B B 3 blue Yes 1<br />

BSC 90 AA 1 blue/1 white Yes 1<br />

90kg chrome 1CR 1 red Yes 1<br />

100kg chrome 1CR 2 red Yes 1<br />

AMS HC Manganese 1 green No 2<br />

AMS LC Manganese W 1 green No 2<br />

MHT - - Yes 1&3<br />

1: Can be drilled using c<strong>on</strong>venti<strong>on</strong>al methods.<br />

2: Can be drilled <strong>on</strong>ly with special tools/techniques.<br />

3: Identificati<strong>on</strong> not yet agreed.<br />

8.1 Introducti<strong>on</strong><br />

The various methods of making electrical c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s to the rail are explained<br />

below:<br />

8.2 Taper Pins<br />

The taper pin requires a 7.2mm hole, 57±2mm above the base of the rail, to be<br />

drilled through the rail. The taper pin c<strong>on</strong>sists of a threaded secti<strong>on</strong> to which the<br />

various c<strong>on</strong>nectors are attached, and a n<strong>on</strong>–threaded end which is tapered to<br />

ensure that the pin is firmly fixed to the rail.<br />

Fit the taper pins into the holes and hit the n<strong>on</strong>–threaded ends with a hammer to<br />

ensure that the pins and the rail are in electrical c<strong>on</strong>tact.<br />

Catalogue numbers are as follows:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> circuit maintenance kit<br />

Comprising:<br />

: 88/10037<br />

Pin, taper, BRS-SM 411, 55mm l<strong>on</strong>g (10) : 86/44013<br />

Nut, self locking, stainless steel,M6 (10) : 3/179995<br />

Washer, stainless steel, M6 (20) : 3/190825<br />

Nut, stainless steel, M6 (10) : 3/175013<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 7


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E8 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

8.3 Pin Brazing<br />

Pin brazing is a method of c<strong>on</strong>necting threaded pins to the rail using electric–arc<br />

brazing. This method will usually be used at new sites or where re–railing takes<br />

place and may be used <strong>on</strong> standard and hardened steel rails. Pin–brazed studs<br />

will be installed by Signal or Permanent Way Engineering staff; any pers<strong>on</strong><br />

engaged in these operati<strong>on</strong>s must hold a Certificate of Competency for the task<br />

to be undertaken.<br />

An M12 pin brazed stud may be brazed to the rail web, as shown in Figure E5.<br />

The minimum spacing between c<strong>on</strong>nectors is 85mm. The correct torque for<br />

attachment of the rail lug to the M12 studs is 60Nm.<br />

NOTE<br />

Self Locking Nut (Supplied) to be<br />

tightened to a torque of 60Nm<br />

200 240<br />

E 8 R A I L T R A C K<br />

115<br />

Pin Brazed TEE C<strong>on</strong>nector<br />

Figure E5<br />

The threaded pins are brazed to the rail, at a positi<strong>on</strong> 57±2mm above the base<br />

of the rail, with a silver based filler metal, using a hand held brazing gun operated<br />

by either of the following pieces of equipment:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Portable machine, battery driven <strong>on</strong> single<br />

rail trolley, suitable for track maintenance,<br />

which will braze approx. 50 pins to the rail. : 20/3003<br />

Large machine, battery driven <strong>on</strong> double rail<br />

trolley. The batteries are recharged by an<br />

integral petrol driven generator. This unit has<br />

a capacity for 50 brazes per hour and is<br />

suitable for new works. : 20/3001<br />

57


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E9 of 52<br />

Both of the above machines require the batteries and the brazing gun to be<br />

ordered separately. These are listed al<strong>on</strong>g with other spares and attachments<br />

as follows:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

VF 2300 Brazing gun : 40/515<br />

VF 2300 Angled gun : 20/3021<br />

VF 2300 Extended gun : 20/3011<br />

VF 2300KA Brazing gun : 20/3010<br />

VFRG Batteries : 20/3002<br />

VFLC Batteries : 20/3004<br />

VFKA Batteries : 20/3007<br />

VFKA 250 Battery unit : 20/3005<br />

VFKA 250 Attache case : 20/3006<br />

Battery charger for vehicle : 20/3008<br />

Battery charger for depot : 20/3009<br />

8mm Ceramic ferrule : 55/27287<br />

9.5mm Ceramic ferrule : 55/16001<br />

8mm Brazing pin : 55/27706<br />

9.5mm Brazing pin : 55/41011<br />

Spark shield : 40/543<br />

C<strong>on</strong>tact arm : 40/507<br />

12mm/M8 Pin holder : 40/561<br />

C<strong>on</strong>tact set complete : 40/521<br />

C<strong>on</strong>tact nipple and disc : 40/555<br />

Ejector rod complete : 40/536<br />

Key set : 40/520<br />

Screw set : 40/556<br />

Rail b<strong>on</strong>d 25mm x 500mm l<strong>on</strong>g : 88/23906<br />

Rail b<strong>on</strong>d 25mm x 145mm l<strong>on</strong>g : 88/23907<br />

Rail B<strong>on</strong>d 25mm x 1500mm l<strong>on</strong>g : 86/43511<br />

T c<strong>on</strong>nector M12 : 55/9366<br />

<strong>Track</strong> end c<strong>on</strong>nector : 20/3013<br />

V C<strong>on</strong>nector 2 x 25mm x 90mm l<strong>on</strong>g : 46/2183<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 9


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E10 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

8.4 Cembre<br />

Cembre is a method by which a copper bush is expanded inside a 22mm hole<br />

drilled into the rail web. A bolt is then passed through the copper bush and is<br />

used to fix a cable lug to the rail. The copper bush should be inserted and<br />

expanded a so<strong>on</strong> as the hole has been drilled. If this is not possible, the hole<br />

should be given a protective coating of jointing paste at the time of drilling and<br />

thoroughly cleaned, in the same manner a described for pin drive fittings when<br />

the bush is fitted. Refer to clause 8.6<br />

Cembre Parts Catalogue No.<br />

Rail lead installati<strong>on</strong> kit (M12 steel screw with hollow : 86/017025<br />

hex. head, flat steel washer & self locking nut)<br />

Copper bush for 22mm dia. hole : 86/017026<br />

Expansi<strong>on</strong> plunger. Calibrated high tensile steel : 86/017027<br />

Hydraulic tool with hand pump c/w carrying case : 86/017028<br />

Go/No Go gauge for checking 22mm rail hole : 86/017029<br />

To ensure that the drilled hole is the correct size a gauge is used as detailed<br />

below and shown in Figure E6 :<br />

a) Insert the Go/No Go gauge into the hole.<br />

b) The hole may be used <strong>on</strong>ly if the green part passes through and the red part<br />

does not.<br />

c) If the red part passes through, redrill a hole in a different positi<strong>on</strong>.<br />

d) The inside of existing holes should be thoroughly cleaned and bright.<br />

Red (No GO Column)<br />

GO / No GO Column<br />

Figure E6<br />

Green (No GO Column)<br />

E 10 R A I L T R A C K<br />

22 Dia<br />

57


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E11 of 52<br />

Once the drilled hole has passed the gauging test the following procedure is<br />

used to expand the copper bush :<br />

Refer to Figure E7.<br />

a) Insert the copper bush (Item A) into the rail web.<br />

b) Insert the calibrated plunger (Item B) <strong>on</strong> bush flange side, ensuring threaded<br />

end projects through to the other side.<br />

c) Depress the tool pressure discharge lever (Item C) to ensure the pist<strong>on</strong> is<br />

fully retracted.<br />

d) Insert the calibrated plunger (Item B) into threaded housing of either tool<br />

seating (Item D) by using gauge (Item E) located <strong>on</strong> hexag<strong>on</strong> end of item B.<br />

e) Pump until the calibrated plunger is completely through.<br />

Figure E7<br />

Running Edge<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 11<br />

C<br />

D<br />

A<br />

D<br />

B<br />

E


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E12 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

With reference to Figure E8, the general assembly procedure of the c<strong>on</strong>nector<br />

is as follows:<br />

a) Insert the hollow hexag<strong>on</strong>al headed stud into the copper bush so that the<br />

thread projects from the bush flange side (this will usually be into the four<br />

foot).<br />

b) The stud head will surround the projecting part of the bush without touching<br />

it. Locate lug <strong>on</strong>to the stud, add washer and lock nut, then tighten to 60Nm<br />

torque.<br />

Type AR 60-3 Steel Stud With<br />

Hollow Hex Head (M12)<br />

Figure E8<br />

Figure E9 shows a typical b<strong>on</strong>ding arrangement.<br />

These dimensi<strong>on</strong>s are <strong>on</strong>ly<br />

typical. Refer to Layout Drawing<br />

for individual situati<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

Figure E9<br />

Running Edge<br />

M12 Washer<br />

Cable Lug<br />

Self Locking Nut<br />

E 12 R A I L T R A C K<br />

240<br />

76<br />

NOTE;<br />

Self locking Nut (supplied)to be<br />

Tightened to a torque of 60 Nm.<br />

57


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E13 of 52<br />

8.5 Aluminio–thermic Welding<br />

Thermic welding is a method of fixing threaded pins to the rail by means of a<br />

thermo–chemical reacti<strong>on</strong>. It can be used for tracti<strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ding in both a.c. and<br />

d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> areas.<br />

Two types of studs are available:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

1<br />

/2 ” x 7 / ” fully threaded stud, complete with<br />

8<br />

nut and washers.<br />

5<br />

/8 ” stud with nut, spring washer and<br />

: Available from ERICO.<br />

flat washer. : 46/19800.<br />

Note (1): Aluminio–thermic welding is also referred to as Cadweld and<br />

Thermoweld.<br />

Note (2): Any pers<strong>on</strong> engaged in these operati<strong>on</strong>s must hold a Certificate of<br />

Competency for the task to be undertaken.<br />

8.6 Pin Drive<br />

This method should be used <strong>on</strong>ly where pin braze or Cembre fittings cannot be<br />

used.<br />

A bimetal rail lug (Railway Catalogue No. 55/27614) provides an aluminium barrel<br />

for crimping to aluminium cable and a copper lug for inserti<strong>on</strong> into the rail.<br />

Where pin–drive lugs are used to make c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s to the running rails, the<br />

22mm holes are drilled by Permanent Way Engineering staff. If the rail<br />

c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> is not made at the time of drilling, the hole is immediately given a<br />

coating of jointing paste (Railway Catalogue No. 7/026200) to minimise the risk<br />

of a high resistance c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> due to corrosi<strong>on</strong>.<br />

The c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> is made as follows:<br />

Before the lug is inserted in the rail, it is cleaned of all existing jointing paste and<br />

all c<strong>on</strong>tact surfaces should be clean, bright, brushed with a circular wire brush<br />

(Railway Catalogue No. 5/4266) and re–coated with a uniform layer of jointing<br />

paste (Railway Catalogue No. 7/026200).<br />

The lug is secured to the rail by means of the rail lug b<strong>on</strong>d pin, refer to Figure<br />

E10. Pin size No.1 (Railway Catalogue No. 55/27860) , is driven in with a<br />

hammer and is used for the first installati<strong>on</strong>. Pin size No. 2 (Railway Catalogue<br />

No. 55/27862) is used for subsequent installati<strong>on</strong>s of a lug. Pin size No.3<br />

(Railway Catalogue No. 55/27863) should be used <strong>on</strong>ly when the rail hole is<br />

oversize, eg. 7 / 8 ” rather than 22mm. After installati<strong>on</strong>, surplus jointing paste<br />

should be wiped off.<br />

All rail lug c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s should be inspected after installati<strong>on</strong> to ensure that the<br />

lug is tight and free from cracks. Any cracked or loose c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s are to be<br />

remade.<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 13


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E14 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

6R<br />

E 14 R A I L T R A C K<br />

41<br />

28<br />

2 x 45 O<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d Pin Number Stamped Here Height 6<br />

Figure E10 shows the rail lug b<strong>on</strong>d pin.<br />

Material : Steel to BS 970 Part 1. 070 M20<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

‘X’<br />

0.13<br />

Figure E10<br />

8.7 The Preformed Moulded Rubber C<strong>on</strong>nector<br />

The rail should have previously been fitted with two threaded studs by <strong>on</strong>e of the<br />

methods described in 8.2 to 8.4.<br />

Secure the moulded c<strong>on</strong>nector <strong>on</strong>to the threaded studs using the self locking<br />

nuts and washers, tightened to a torque of 13 Nm, as shown in Figure E11.<br />

Ensure that the stud protrudes at least <strong>on</strong>e full turn through the nut. Do not fit a<br />

nut or washer between the rail and moulded c<strong>on</strong>nector.<br />

Fit the flange clip over the cable and push the clip <strong>on</strong>to the foot of the rail.<br />

Catalogue numbers are as follows:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Flange Clip, 6.5mm BRS–SM 849 (1) 86/43489<br />

Moulded Flexible TC Lead 2.5mm²<br />

3.0 metres : 86/44022<br />

4.5 metres : 86/44023<br />

6.5 metres : 86/44024<br />

8.0 metres : 86/44025<br />

30.0 metres : 86/44026


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Cable Terminati<strong>on</strong> Label<br />

TCABRB (1)<br />

Flange Clip<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E15 of 52<br />

Taper Pin<br />

Stainless Steel<br />

Washer<br />

Stainless Steel<br />

Locking Nut<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 15<br />

76mm<br />

57 + 2mm<br />

Figure E11<br />

8.8 The “L” Plate C<strong>on</strong>nector<br />

“L” Plate c<strong>on</strong>nectors are used <strong>on</strong>ly where preformed cables are inappropriate.<br />

The rail is drilled in accordance with Figure E12.<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> circuit rail c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> kit : 86/44019<br />

Comprising:<br />

Pin, taper, BRS-SM 411, 55mm l<strong>on</strong>g (2) : 86/44013<br />

Nut, self locking, stainless steel, M6 (2) : 03/179995<br />

Washer, stainless steel, M6 (4) : 03/190825<br />

Nut, stainless steel, M6 (2) : 03/175013<br />

Plate, BRS-SM 848 (1) : 86/43488<br />

Terminal, crimped, black sleeve, M6 (1) : 54/119568<br />

Flange clip, 6.5mm, BRS–SM 849 (1) : 86/43489<br />

Tube, heat shrinkable, 55mm l<strong>on</strong>g (1) : 55/120989


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E16 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Flange clips may also be obtained for larger cable sizes:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Flange clip, 15mm, BRS–SM 849 (2) : 86/43498<br />

Aster and TI21 <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Flange clip, 23mm, BRS–SM 849 (3) : 86/43499<br />

Inductive Loop Reed <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Cable Terminati<strong>on</strong> Label<br />

TCABRB (1)<br />

Flange<br />

Clip<br />

`L' Plate<br />

Stainless Steel<br />

Washer & Locking Nut<br />

Heat Shrink Sleeve<br />

Stainless Steel<br />

Washer & Nut<br />

E 16 R A I L T R A C K<br />

76mm<br />

Two Holes<br />

7.2 Dia.<br />

57 + 2mm<br />

Figure E12<br />

The rail should have previously been fitted with two threaded studs by <strong>on</strong>e of the<br />

methods described in 8.2 to 8.4.<br />

Fit a washer and nut to each threaded stud and tighten to a torque of 13 Nm.<br />

Strip back 20mm of the outer sheath of the 2.5mm²(f) cable, followed by<br />

8 - 9mm of the inner sheath to expose the c<strong>on</strong>ductor.<br />

Slide the crimp terminal <strong>on</strong>to the cable and crimp it. Ensure that the crimping<br />

tool is the correct size, and matches the crimp terminal being used. The kit<br />

currently c<strong>on</strong>tains an AMP PIDG 6mm terminal, for which a yellow/black handled<br />

AMP tool (59239-4) must be used.<br />

Slide the heat–shrink sleeve <strong>on</strong>to the “L” plate and thread the cable through the<br />

sleeve until the eye of the crimp is over the end hole of the ‘‘L’’ plate.


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

9 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

Disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong><br />

Box<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E17 of 52<br />

Move the heat–shrink sleeve until the entire stripped length of the cable is<br />

covered by the sleeve without restricting the securing hole.<br />

Apply heat to the heat–shrink sleeve. Before heating, the sleeve is 55mm l<strong>on</strong>g,<br />

and reduces to about 50mm when it is fully heat–shrunk <strong>on</strong>to the cable and the<br />

plate.<br />

Place the “L” plate assembly <strong>on</strong>to the threaded studs and secure using the<br />

remaining washers and the self locking nuts, tightened to a torque of 13 Nm.<br />

Fit the flange clip over the cable and push the clip <strong>on</strong>to the rail.<br />

The typical arrangement of the track circuit disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> box is shown in Figure<br />

E13. It is mounted <strong>on</strong> a stake using two M8 studs (supplied with the box) and<br />

comprises a moulded rubber back with a slide–<strong>on</strong> metal cover which can be<br />

padlocked using the standard RKB221 padlock. Provisi<strong>on</strong> is made to securely<br />

clamp both the lineside apparatus housing tail cables and track lead cables in the<br />

base of the box. A l<strong>on</strong>ger stake is available for use where ground c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s are<br />

poor.<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Stake (Angle), 760mm l<strong>on</strong>g, to BRS-SM 104/13 :<br />

Catalogue No.<br />

86/10751<br />

Stake (Angle), 1070mm l<strong>on</strong>g to BRS-SM 104/11 : 86/88250<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Circuit Disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> Box : 86/43877<br />

The terminati<strong>on</strong> for each track circuit comprises a four way 2BA link block. The<br />

various cables should be terminated as shown in Figure E14 (this enables the<br />

individual track leads of duplicated arrangements to be disc<strong>on</strong>nected/tested<br />

separately).<br />

Note 1: Only <strong>on</strong>e track circuit is allowed in a Disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> Box and hence<br />

double track circuit boxes are not to be used.<br />

Note 2: Separate tail cables must be provided for each track circuit end.<br />

Note 3: Disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> Boxes should be mounted in a permanent Green Z<strong>on</strong>e<br />

as defined in GO/RT3073.<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 17


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E18 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Figure E13<br />

Figure E14<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Rail 2<br />

Duplicate<br />

<strong>Track</strong><br />

Cable<br />

Tail<br />

Cable<br />

E 18 R A I L T R A C K<br />

Rail 2<br />

Lead<br />

To<br />

Lineside<br />

Apparatus<br />

Housing<br />

Rail 1<br />

Lead<br />

Rail 1<br />

Duplicate<br />

<strong>Track</strong><br />

Cable


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

10 Arrangement of<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Lead Rail<br />

C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

(Except Jointless)<br />

A<br />

B<br />

Dis<br />

Box<br />

C<br />

D<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E19 of 52<br />

Figure E15 and Figure E16 show typical arrangements of rail c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

either side of an insulated joint. Figure E15 uses 90mm diameter orange pipe<br />

and is the preferred arrangement, except where the pipe is unable to be<br />

threaded under the rail, (eg. tunnels and other areas of restricted use). Figure<br />

E16 shows the alternative method where the cables are clipped to the top of the<br />

sleepers.<br />

In both cases, duplicated single core 2.5mm²(f) flexible cable, fitted with moulded<br />

rubber c<strong>on</strong>nectors, is the preferred arrangement to be used between the<br />

disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> box and the rail. It is terminated <strong>on</strong> the four foot side of the rail.<br />

Under no circumstances should the track leads of different track circuits share a<br />

comm<strong>on</strong> rail c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Note Combining two track circuits into <strong>on</strong>e 4 core cable is not permitted.<br />

If required, in order to avoid vandalism, the disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> box can be replaced<br />

by a heat–shrink jointing kit.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> lead arrangements for jointless track circuits are described in the relevant<br />

secti<strong>on</strong> dealing with the particular design.<br />

IRJ<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong> Return B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

w Y<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 19<br />

IRJ<br />

On n<strong>on</strong>-electrified lines the first bay<br />

to be left clear<br />

Cable Route<br />

X<br />

Dis<br />

Box<br />

Note Dis Boxes should be mounted in a permanent Green Z<strong>on</strong>e as defined in<br />

GO/RT3073.<br />

Figure E15<br />

Z


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E20 of 52<br />

A C<br />

B<br />

D<br />

Dis<br />

Box<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

IRJ<br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong> Return B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

IRJ<br />

On n<strong>on</strong>-electrified lines the first bay<br />

to be left clear<br />

Cable Route<br />

E 20 R A I L T R A C K<br />

W<br />

X<br />

Dis<br />

Box<br />

Note Dis Boxes should be mounted in a permanent Green Z<strong>on</strong>e as defined in<br />

GO/RT3073.<br />

Figure E16<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Pipe, Medium Density, Orange,<br />

6 metres x 90mm : 86/44141<br />

Clip, Pipe for 90mm o/d pipe : 86/44140<br />

Fastaway Clip, 6.5mm for 2.5mm²(f) cable : 86/43489<br />

Moulded Flexible TC Lead 2.5mm²(f):<br />

3.0 metre : 86/44022<br />

4.5 metre : 86/44023<br />

6.5 metre : 86/44024<br />

8.0 metre : 86/44025<br />

30.0 metre : 86/44026<br />

Disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> Box for <strong>Track</strong> Circuit : 86/43877<br />

Stake for Disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> Box 760mm L<strong>on</strong>g : 86/10751<br />

Stake for Disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> Box 1070mm L<strong>on</strong>g : 86/10751<br />

Cable Joint Kit, 1 x 2.5mm²(f) single to<br />

1 x 2.5mm² single : 54/15875<br />

Cable Joint Kit, 2 x 2.5mm²(f) single to<br />

1 x 2.5mm² two core : 54/15873<br />

Cable Joint Kit, 2 x 2.5mm²(f) single to<br />

1 x 2.5mm² single : 54/36101<br />

Cable Joint Kit, 4 x 2.5mm²(f) single to<br />

1 x 2.5mm² two core : 54/36102<br />

Y<br />

Z


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

11 Fishplate B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E21 of 52<br />

The method and comp<strong>on</strong>ents described in this secti<strong>on</strong> are to be used to improve<br />

the reliability of the electrical c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> between pieces of rail which are already<br />

in casual electrical c<strong>on</strong>tact by virtue of their c<strong>on</strong>structi<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Whilst the most obvious item in this category is the n<strong>on</strong>–insulated fishplate type<br />

rail joint <strong>on</strong> all n<strong>on</strong>–electrified and a.c. electrified lines, this method of b<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

extends to elements of S & C, such as crossings, wing rails etc, where the<br />

comp<strong>on</strong>ents are also bolted together without intervening insulati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

On d.c. or dual a.c./d.c. electrified lines, it is to be used <strong>on</strong> the signal rail <strong>on</strong>ly of<br />

single rail track circuits. B<strong>on</strong>ding of fishplates in the tracti<strong>on</strong> return rail of d.c.<br />

electrified railways is the resp<strong>on</strong>sibility of the Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer.<br />

11.1 Standard Fishplate Arrangement<br />

Two 7.2mm holes, 76mm apart, are drilled through the rail web in the first<br />

sleeper bay each side of the joint. The holes should be 57 ±2mm above the<br />

base of the rail. The b<strong>on</strong>ds should generally be fitted <strong>on</strong> the four foot side of the<br />

rail using channel pins and run close to the base of the rail, as shown in Figure<br />

E17. The short exposed end of the b<strong>on</strong>d should be folded flat and hammered<br />

against the rail. B<strong>on</strong>ds should not be threaded through the fishplates or rail<br />

fastenings. In areas pr<strong>on</strong>e to vandalism the b<strong>on</strong>ds may be passed under the rail<br />

so that they are less vulnerable; when this is d<strong>on</strong>e <strong>on</strong>e end of each b<strong>on</strong>d is<br />

attached to the inside of the rail and the other end to the outside. However,<br />

b<strong>on</strong>ds should not be passed to the outside of the rail if there is a c<strong>on</strong>ductor rail<br />

<strong>on</strong> that side.<br />

Catalogue numbers are as follows:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d, solid steel, galvanised, 4.29mm x 1670mm : 86/44149<br />

Channel Pin to BRS-SE33 : 86/44012<br />

A<br />

Figure E17<br />

76<br />

B<br />

535<br />

57 ± 2mm<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 21<br />

535<br />

A<br />

76<br />

B<br />

Running Edge<br />

Channel Pin 7.2mm DIA. Hole<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E22 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

11.2 Standard S&C Arrangements<br />

11.2.1 Switch/Stock Rail<br />

Figure E18<br />

Switch Rail<br />

Stock Rail<br />

11.2.2 Acute Fabricated Crossing<br />

E 22 R A I L T R A C K<br />

*<br />

*<br />

Parallel Wing Extensi<strong>on</strong><br />

Figure E19<br />

If a parallel wing is fitted, holes marked * should have b<strong>on</strong>d leads fitted prior to<br />

assembly of vee and before the parallel wing is attached. The leads should be<br />

tied al<strong>on</strong>g the rail to prevent damage in transit.<br />

11.2.3 Obtuse Fabricated Crossing<br />

Figure E20


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

12 Jumper B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E23 of 52<br />

11.3 Fishplates in C<strong>on</strong>crete Bearer Pointwork<br />

Rail to rail fishplate b<strong>on</strong>ding in c<strong>on</strong>crete bearer S & C should be achieved using<br />

the same techniques as specified for Standard Jumper B<strong>on</strong>ding.<br />

11.4 Redundant Insulated Rail Joints<br />

Where redundant insulated rail joints cannot be avoided:<br />

a) In d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> areas, the Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer should be requested to<br />

install all temporary b<strong>on</strong>ds across IRJs which will carry Tracti<strong>on</strong> Return<br />

Current. If the b<strong>on</strong>d is to carry track circuit currents <strong>on</strong>ly, Galvanised Ir<strong>on</strong><br />

(GI) b<strong>on</strong>ds may be used and be fitted by the Signal Engineer.<br />

b) In a.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> areas, if either side of an IRJ is a tracti<strong>on</strong> return rail, the<br />

Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer should install the temporary b<strong>on</strong>d, but if both sides<br />

of the IRJ are signal rails then standard fishplate b<strong>on</strong>ds may be used as a<br />

temporary measure.<br />

c) In n<strong>on</strong>–electric tracti<strong>on</strong> areas, ordinary b<strong>on</strong>ds should be used.<br />

This secti<strong>on</strong> describes the comp<strong>on</strong>ents and installati<strong>on</strong> of jumper b<strong>on</strong>ds<br />

designed to carry track circuit currents <strong>on</strong>ly. Apart from special cases of<br />

impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds, tracti<strong>on</strong> jumpers are the resp<strong>on</strong>sibility of the Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

Engineer. Refer to Secti<strong>on</strong> 2.<br />

12.1 Standard Jumper B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

This arrangement should be used <strong>on</strong> n<strong>on</strong>–electrified lines and <strong>on</strong> the signal rail<br />

<strong>on</strong>ly of d.c. or dual a.c./d.c. electrified lines. It should not be used for yellow<br />

b<strong>on</strong>ding purposes.<br />

Standard jumper b<strong>on</strong>ding uses the same single core cable as used for track<br />

terminati<strong>on</strong>s (GS/ES 0872 Type C1 2.5mm²(f)) terminated in the rail web, using<br />

either the “L” Plate c<strong>on</strong>nector or preformed moulded rubber c<strong>on</strong>nector.<br />

For cable lengths and catalogue numbers see 10.<br />

12.2 Yellow Standard B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

Yellow standard b<strong>on</strong>ding uses GS/ES 0872, 35mm² cable, identified with a<br />

yellow sheath or a yellow sleeve at the terminati<strong>on</strong>. The b<strong>on</strong>ds are supplied in<br />

various lengths with a moulded rubber c<strong>on</strong>nector for c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> to the rail at <strong>on</strong>e<br />

end and unterminated at the other. Yellow b<strong>on</strong>ds should not be installed more<br />

than 20m apart.<br />

Catalogue numbers are as follows:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Moulded Flexible TC Lead 35mm² :<br />

3.0 metre : 86/44155<br />

4.5 metre : 86/44154<br />

6.5 metre : 86/44153<br />

8.0 metre : 86/44152<br />

30.0 metre : 86/44151<br />

Jointing Kit For Moulded Flexible TC<br />

Lead 35mm² : 54/037092<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 23


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E24 of 52<br />

13 High Voltages<br />

14 Lineside Apparatus<br />

Housing Wiring<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Fix warning signs (Figure E21) to all exposed track circuit capacitors and to the<br />

outside of lineside apparatus housings c<strong>on</strong>taining high voltage track circuit<br />

equipment.<br />

Catalogue numbers are as follows:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Safety sign, yellow triangle<br />

“cauti<strong>on</strong> risk of electric shock”,<br />

50mm wide : 56/144135<br />

Safety sign, yellow triangle<br />

“cauti<strong>on</strong> risk of electric shock”,<br />

100mm wide : 56/144111<br />

Safety sign, yellow triangle<br />

“cauti<strong>on</strong> risk of electric shock”,<br />

150mm wide : 56/144130<br />

Safety sign, yellow triangle<br />

“cauti<strong>on</strong> risk of electric shock”<br />

plastic laminate 300mm x 300mm : 56/144611<br />

Figure E21<br />

For general wiring procedures the appropriate Code of Practice should be<br />

c<strong>on</strong>sulted. Refer to Codes of Practice within the <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Handbook for<br />

special cases.<br />

14.1 Protecti<strong>on</strong> of Terminals<br />

Terminals in lineside apparatus housings, dis. boxes, etc and impedance b<strong>on</strong>d<br />

terminal boxes should be corrosi<strong>on</strong> proofed using Valvoline Tectyl 506<br />

(Catalogue No. 7/58553) as so<strong>on</strong> as wiring and testing are complete. Valvoline<br />

should not be applied to capacitor adjusting slides, fuse clips or end caps, or the<br />

windings of wire–wound resistors.<br />

E 24 R A I L T R A C K


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

15 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>ds<br />

Manufacturer Style Freq.<br />

(Hz)<br />

Howells or<br />

WBS<br />

Howells or<br />

WBS<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E25 of 52<br />

15.1 Handling Precauti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

When transporting impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds, they should be lifted <strong>on</strong>ly by the lifting lugs<br />

or at the defined lifting points. Under no circumstances should any weight be<br />

taken <strong>on</strong> the tracti<strong>on</strong> lead terminals or cable lugs as this can result in damage to<br />

the insulati<strong>on</strong>, allowing water to enter.<br />

Type 3 impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds have positi<strong>on</strong>s for lifting lugs to be fitted, which should<br />

be removed as so<strong>on</strong> as the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d has been placed in the track and<br />

replaced with the supplied means of protecting the threads.<br />

15.2 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d Types and Restricti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Refer to the table in Figure E22<br />

Functi<strong>on</strong> Type Cat No Oil<br />

Filled<br />

Aux. Coil<br />

Ratio<br />

Weight<br />

(Kg)<br />

Supply<br />

WH3 50 Universal 3 86/17024 No 56: 1 160 N<br />

MR or<br />

S<br />

50 Universal 2 86/17023 No 56:1 160 O<br />

WBS P3 50 Universal 1 88/1237 Yes 45:1 S<br />

SGE DE 50 Universal I 88/83945 Yes 40:1 120 S<br />

WBS M 50/75 Specific 0 Yes 42:1 230 O<br />

WBS M2/5 50/75 Specific* 0 88/83948 Yes 42:1 190 S<br />

WBS M650/<br />

75<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Specific 0 88/83952 Yes 45:1 230 O<br />

SGE DD 50 Universal 0 Yes 42:1 230 O<br />

GRS B 50 Specific 0 Yes 45:1 O<br />

Figure E22<br />

The table in Figure E22 is interpreted as follows:<br />

Functi<strong>on</strong><br />

Universal<br />

Impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds shown as ”Universal” may be used for all functi<strong>on</strong>s in all<br />

styles of track circuit approved for use in d.c. electric tracti<strong>on</strong> areas,<br />

subject <strong>on</strong>ly to their ability to cope with the designed tracti<strong>on</strong> current load.<br />

Note: Saturati<strong>on</strong> levels and avoidance of particular combinati<strong>on</strong>s of b<strong>on</strong>d<br />

and track relay, should be c<strong>on</strong>sidered when replacing b<strong>on</strong>ds of <strong>on</strong>e style<br />

with another (see Clause 15.4).<br />

The impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds are tuned to 50Hz. For other frequencies, internal<br />

res<strong>on</strong>ating capacitors are fitted.<br />

Specific<br />

Impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds shown as ”Specific” are specially set or tuned to perform<br />

feed, relay or intermediate functi<strong>on</strong>s at a particular frequency. If, in an<br />

emergency, an impedance b<strong>on</strong>d is required to perform a different functi<strong>on</strong><br />

or operate at the other frequency, it should be re–tuned.<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 25


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E26 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

* WBS style M2/5 impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds have been serviced as ”Universal”<br />

since 1984.<br />

Notes<br />

N. (New) - In producti<strong>on</strong> and serviced.<br />

S. (Serviced) - Out of producti<strong>on</strong>, but still serviced.<br />

O. (Obsolete) - Out of producti<strong>on</strong> and not serviced.<br />

Type<br />

All new impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds are manufactured to specificati<strong>on</strong> BR863, the current<br />

rating of which is shown in Figure E23:<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d Type <br />

Type 3 3000A c<strong>on</strong>tinuous, 4500A for 2 hours<br />

Type 2 2400A c<strong>on</strong>tinuous, 3600A for I hour<br />

Type I 950A c<strong>on</strong>tinuous, 1100A for I hour (Not to BR863)<br />

Type 0 (Not to BR863)<br />

Figure E23<br />

On high current dc. tracti<strong>on</strong> lines, ie. where classes 92, 373, 465 and 471<br />

locomotives and multiple units run in revenue–earning service, <strong>on</strong>ly Type 3<br />

impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds fitted with six side leads (three <strong>on</strong> each side) are to be used.<br />

On other lines, any type of impedance b<strong>on</strong>d may be used and need <strong>on</strong>ly be<br />

fitted with two side leads.<br />

15.3 Sleeper Spacing<br />

The sleeper spacing required for impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds is shown in Figure E24.<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d Style Type Sleeper Centres (mm)<br />

WH3 3 650*<br />

MR or S 2 750**<br />

P3 1 635<br />

DE 1 585<br />

M 0 700<br />

M2/5 0 700<br />

M6 0 700<br />

DD 0 725<br />

B 0 710<br />

Figure E24<br />

* The fixing centres for Type 3 impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds is 650mm. However, any<br />

spacing between 570mm and 730mm will be satisfactory as the<br />

impedance b<strong>on</strong>d is not fixed down at the terminal box end (see Figure<br />

E26).<br />

* * S and MR impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds are also <strong>on</strong>ly fixed at <strong>on</strong>e end, therefore the<br />

spacing of the sleepers is not critical<br />

E 26 R A I L T R A C K


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E27 of 52<br />

15.4 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d Interchangeability<br />

When an impedance b<strong>on</strong>d is changed for another type, it is usually necessary to<br />

change some or all of the associated c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s. Figure E25 is included as a<br />

guide to the items affected. The preferred replacement is shown shaded.<br />

As well as physical interchangeability, the replacement b<strong>on</strong>d will need to be<br />

sufficiently rated for the peak and c<strong>on</strong>tinuous tracti<strong>on</strong> currents that occur <strong>on</strong> that<br />

line.<br />

Imbalance in tracti<strong>on</strong> return currents will tend to apply a proporti<strong>on</strong> of any<br />

interference c<strong>on</strong>tent to track circuit receivers, which under particular c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

could lead to a wr<strong>on</strong>g side failure. One mechanism whereby imbalance is<br />

detected, is due to saturati<strong>on</strong> of the impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds. As the difference<br />

between the tracti<strong>on</strong> currents flowing through the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d’s half<br />

windings increase, the transformer acti<strong>on</strong> of the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d becomes less<br />

efficient as it is driven into saturati<strong>on</strong>, thereby suppressing the track circuit<br />

voltage. The operati<strong>on</strong> of the track circuit will become unreliable, but some<br />

protecti<strong>on</strong> against wr<strong>on</strong>g side failure of the track circuit is provided.<br />

The level of imbalance current required to saturate impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds is roughly<br />

proporti<strong>on</strong>al to their rating, with higher rated type 3 b<strong>on</strong>ds able to withstand<br />

greater imbalance current levels than type 2 b<strong>on</strong>ds for example. This saturati<strong>on</strong><br />

of impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds leading to right side failure of the track circuit, can provide<br />

useful protecti<strong>on</strong> against wr<strong>on</strong>g side failure due to tracti<strong>on</strong> interference.<br />

Therefore, care should be applied when replacing <strong>on</strong>e type of b<strong>on</strong>d for another,<br />

as the tolerance to imbalance may be increased, but at the expense of detecti<strong>on</strong><br />

of situati<strong>on</strong>s where track circuits become exposed to tracti<strong>on</strong> interference which<br />

could lead to wr<strong>on</strong>g side failure.<br />

Additi<strong>on</strong>ally, certain b<strong>on</strong>d/relay combinati<strong>on</strong>s should be avoided as they may<br />

create problems in correctly setting up 50Hz a.c. double rail track circuits. In<br />

particular, G4 relays should not be used with type 2 or type 3 b<strong>on</strong>ds. If the track<br />

relay is a style CE391, the recommended replacement impedance b<strong>on</strong>d is style<br />

DE, but if this is not available, it will usually be necessary to change the relay and<br />

base to a VT1. It is also recommended that the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d at the other<br />

end of the track circuit is changed in order to get a satisfactory adjustment,<br />

particularly if a style B impedance b<strong>on</strong>d is being displaced.<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 27


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E28 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

TABLE OF IMPEDANCE BOND INTERCHANGEABILITY<br />

Old<br />

Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d Comp<strong>on</strong>ent New Impedance B<strong>on</strong>ds<br />

WH3 P3 DE M2/5<br />

Side leads C E T C<br />

MR Plate C C C C<br />

Tail cable E J J J<br />

Side leads E C C T<br />

S Plate C C C C<br />

Tail cable E J J J<br />

Side leads C E C T<br />

P3 Plate D E D C<br />

Tail cable R E R J<br />

Side leads E C E T<br />

DE Plate D D E D<br />

Tail cable R R E J<br />

Side leads C T C T<br />

M Plate D C C E<br />

Tail cable R E R E<br />

Side leads C C C E<br />

M2/5 Plate D D D E<br />

Tail cable R R R E<br />

Side leads C C C E<br />

M6 Plate D D D E<br />

Tail cable R R R E<br />

Side leads C C C T<br />

DD Plate D C C D<br />

Tail cable R E E E<br />

Side leads C C C T<br />

B Plate D C C T<br />

Tail cable R R J J<br />

Legend<br />

E Existing comp<strong>on</strong>ent can be re–used.<br />

C Existing comp<strong>on</strong>ent to be changed.<br />

T Existing comp<strong>on</strong>ent can be used temporarily.<br />

D Existing re–drilled and/or cut<br />

J Joint required.<br />

R Re–use (may be jointed using kit, Railway Catalogue No S411S289.<br />

Figure E25<br />

E 28 R A I L T R A C K


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E29 of 52<br />

15.5 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d Spares and Repairs<br />

Maintenance and local stock holding will generally be made easier if different<br />

styles of impedance b<strong>on</strong>d are not intermixed within a track circuit.<br />

Surplus and defective impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds should be returned intact to the local<br />

Infrastructure Store for servicing. New or re–serviced impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds are<br />

available to order from the stores organisati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

In an emergency, ie. if a possessi<strong>on</strong> or a replacement impedance b<strong>on</strong>d cannot<br />

be obtained, replacement of faulty parts may be carried out in–situ in some<br />

cases. The following spare parts are available. Railway catalogue numbers are<br />

given where applicable:<br />

15.5.1 Style WH3<br />

Not repairable.<br />

15.5.2 Style MR<br />

Obsolete, parts out of producti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

15.5.3 Style S<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No<br />

Terminal box (CD1073) : 86/43866<br />

Terminal block (WBS Drg B41464/1) : N/A<br />

Terminal label (WBS Drg J14676/– : N/A<br />

Cable gland 25mm (Hawke type 300 P25) : N/A<br />

Cable gland 20mm : 54/109127<br />

Blanking grommet 25mm (RS605–677) : N/A<br />

Blanking grommet 20mm (RS 605–661) : N/A<br />

Resilient mounting : 86/117018<br />

15.5.4 Style P3<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No<br />

Coil, universal : 88/49566<br />

Covers, main : 88/84009<br />

Covers, terminal box : 88/84010<br />

Gasket, main cover : 88/84011<br />

Gasket, terminal box cover : 88/84012<br />

Plate lug centre c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> : 88/27761<br />

Seal rubber, side lead A/57117/1 : 88/26415<br />

Terminal assy. CD.1055/S : 88/84013<br />

15.5.5 Style DE<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No<br />

Coil, auxiliary (2BA lugs) : 88/2308<br />

Coil, auxiliary (OBA lugs) D4/21048A : 88/84038<br />

Cover, main : 88/84039<br />

Cover, terminal box : 88/84040<br />

Gasket main cover : 88/84041<br />

Gasket terminal box cover : 88/84042<br />

15.5.6 Style M<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No<br />

Coil, auxiliary, feed or relay : 88/83976<br />

Coil, auxiliary, res<strong>on</strong>ated : 88/2321<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 29


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E30 of 52<br />

16 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

Installati<strong>on</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

15.5.7 Style M2/5<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No<br />

Coil, c<strong>on</strong>denser : 88/26065<br />

Plate, lug, steel (pairs with screws)<br />

for fitting side c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s : 88/83987<br />

15.5.8 Style M6<br />

Obsolete, parts out of producti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

15.5.9 Style DD<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No<br />

Coil, auxiliary : 88/83553<br />

Gasket, main cover : 88/27047<br />

15.5.10 Style B<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No<br />

Coil auxiliary : 88/83958<br />

Terminal box : 88/25802<br />

Cover, terminal box : 88/83959<br />

15.5.11 <str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> Spares<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No<br />

Sealing Compound Red Hermabte no. 5400 : 7/60180<br />

Oil, insulating (impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds) 2.5 litre : 27/13802<br />

CAUTION: Care should be taken to avoid trapping fingers when handling<br />

impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds.<br />

16.1 Type 3 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

Type 3 impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds supplied to BR863 have blanking plates, grommets or<br />

plastic plugs in the terminal box holes, together with <strong>on</strong>e M25 gland, for 2c Type<br />

C2 2.5mm²(f) and four M20 glands, for single core Type C1 2. 5mm²(f).<br />

The impedance b<strong>on</strong>d is also supplied with resilient mountings, either fitted or<br />

supplied separately. The resilient mounting feet comprise two porti<strong>on</strong>s and, if<br />

not already fitted, should be glued together using Araldite Rapide or Araldite<br />

(Railway Catalogue No. 7/103330).<br />

The cable glands should be fitted as required and the internal lock nuts glued<br />

with Araldite. If unused holes are fitted with plastic plugs, these should be<br />

replaced with threaded blanking plates. Surplus blanking plates, grommets and<br />

glands should be retained as spares.<br />

In instances where the auxiliary coil box is pr<strong>on</strong>e to water accumulati<strong>on</strong>, a 3mm<br />

hole may be carefully drilled in the bottom of the terminal box and all swarf<br />

cleared away.<br />

The b<strong>on</strong>d is now ready for installati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

The standard installati<strong>on</strong> arrangements for Type 3 b<strong>on</strong>ds <strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>crete or wooden<br />

sleepers (Howells or WBS Style WH3) are shown in Figure E26, Figure E27<br />

and Figure E28.<br />

E 30 R A I L T R A C K


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

CL<br />

200<br />

200<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E31 of 52<br />

After installati<strong>on</strong>, it is particularly important to ensure that all glands are securely<br />

tightened <strong>on</strong>to the cables and that all unused entry holes are properly sealed.<br />

This will reduce the incidence of failures resulting from an accumulati<strong>on</strong> of brake<br />

dust <strong>on</strong> the terminal block and tuning capacitor.<br />

Debris exclusi<strong>on</strong> covers should be fitted to Type 3 b<strong>on</strong>ds:<br />

For WBS WH3 Railway Catalogue No 86/17030<br />

For Howells WH3 Railway Catalogue No 86/17031<br />

Note Under no circumstances may a b<strong>on</strong>d be commissi<strong>on</strong>ed unless all glands<br />

are correctly fitted and any unused holes are fitted with a threaded<br />

blanking plate.<br />

For drilling of holes in c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers/bearers, see GK/RC0754 Part D.<br />

Figure E26 shows the Typical Pin Brazed Arrangement for the Type 3<br />

Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

Arrangement This Side of IRJ To Be Used For Double/Single &<br />

Double/Double Layout For Type 3 B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d Not Secured To<br />

sleeper At This End<br />

For Cable Lengths<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E18<br />

85 240<br />

85<br />

85 240<br />

200<br />

85<br />

200<br />

Cable Lugs Secured <strong>on</strong> Top<br />

of B<strong>on</strong>d Lug<br />

Holes for Temporary<br />

Jumpers When Required<br />

Cable Lugs Secured<br />

Underside of B<strong>on</strong>d Lug<br />

For Rail C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

see Secti<strong>on</strong> E8<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 31<br />

I.R.J.<br />

For Arrangement<br />

This Side of IRJ<br />

See Figure E27 & Figure E28<br />

For Busbar Packing<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E17<br />

For Busbar Details<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E17<br />

All Cables To Be Clear of<br />

Tamping Z<strong>on</strong>es<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E6<br />

I.R.J.<br />

For securing b<strong>on</strong>d <strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers drill <strong>on</strong> centre line at 400 ctrs 12 dia and secure with Hilti heavy duty<br />

anchors HSA 12x 110 Hilti code 66337 (2 OFF). For wooden sleepers use coach screws 5/8" x 6".<br />

Catalogue No 35/13950. Screws not to be driven fully home but left approximately 25 above b<strong>on</strong>d lugs.<br />

Figure E26


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E32 of 52<br />

Arrangement This<br />

Side of IRJ To Be Used<br />

For Double/Single &<br />

Double/Double<br />

Layout For Type 3 B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

Arrangement This<br />

Side of IRJ To Be Used<br />

For Double/Single &<br />

Double/Double<br />

Layout For Type 3 B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

I.R.J.<br />

I.R.J.<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Figure E27 shows the Busbar Pin Brazed C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s for Plain Line/L<strong>on</strong>g<br />

Switch Fr<strong>on</strong>ts.<br />

For Busbar Details<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E17<br />

For Busbar Packing<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E17<br />

For Cable Lengths<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E18<br />

Arrangements This Side of IRJ To Be Used For<br />

Double/Single Layouts<br />

Figure E27<br />

200<br />

200<br />

Hole Positi<strong>on</strong>s In Busbar<br />

To Be Drilled On Site<br />

For Rail C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s see<br />

Secti<strong>on</strong> E8<br />

Notes<br />

All Cables To Be Clear of<br />

Tamping Z<strong>on</strong>es<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E6<br />

E 32 R A I L T R A C K<br />

155<br />

240<br />

155<br />

240<br />

For Busbar Restrictor<br />

Arrangement<br />

See Figure E43<br />

200<br />

200<br />

For Rail C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s see Secti<strong>on</strong> E8<br />

Figure E27 shows the Busbar Pin Brazed C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s for Short Switch Fr<strong>on</strong>ts.<br />

I.R.J.<br />

For Busbar Details<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E17<br />

For Busbar Packing<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E17<br />

For Cable Lengths<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E18<br />

I.R.J.<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Arrangements This Side of IRJ To Be Used For<br />

Double/Single Layouts<br />

Notes<br />

All Cables To Be Clear of<br />

Tamping Z<strong>on</strong>es Secti<strong>on</strong> E6<br />

Figure E28<br />

S S<br />

For Rail C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s see Secti<strong>on</strong> E8<br />

155<br />

240<br />

155<br />

240<br />

For Busbar Restrictor<br />

Arrangement<br />

See Figure E43<br />

Hole Positi<strong>on</strong>s In Busbar<br />

To Be Drilled On Site<br />

For Rail C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

see Secti<strong>on</strong> E8


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

B<strong>on</strong>d Not Secured To<br />

sleeper At This End<br />

For Cable Lengths<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E18<br />

S S<br />

Plastic Pipe<br />

Type 2 B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E33 of 52<br />

16.2 Type 2 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

The standard installati<strong>on</strong> arrangements for Type 2 (Style MR or S) impedance<br />

b<strong>on</strong>ds <strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>crete or wooden sleepers are shown in Figure E28 and Figure<br />

E29.<br />

Arrangement This Side of IRJ To Be Used<br />

For Double/Single & Double/Double Layout For<br />

Type 2 B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

For Rail C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

see Secti<strong>on</strong> E8<br />

For Busbar Packing<br />

see Secti<strong>on</strong> E17<br />

This Drawing Should Only Be Used For<br />

Renewal of Individual Comp<strong>on</strong>ents in<br />

Existing Installati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

I.R.J.<br />

For Busbar Details<br />

See Secti<strong>on</strong> E17<br />

Notes<br />

All Cables To Be Clear<br />

of Tamping<br />

Z<strong>on</strong>es see Secti<strong>on</strong> E6<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 33<br />

I.R.J.<br />

Arrangements This Side of IRJ To Be Used<br />

For Double/Single Layouts<br />

S S<br />

For Busbar Restrictor<br />

Arrangement<br />

see Figure E43<br />

Hole Positi<strong>on</strong>s In Busbar<br />

To Be Drilled On Site<br />

For securing b<strong>on</strong>d <strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers drill <strong>on</strong> centre line at 400 ctrs 12 dia and secure with Hilti heavy duty<br />

anchors HSA 12x 110 Hilti code 66337 (2 OFF). For wooden sleepers use coach screws 5/8" x 6".<br />

Catalogue No 35/13950. Screws not to be driven fully home but left approximately 25 above b<strong>on</strong>d lugs.<br />

Figure E29


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E34 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

16.3 Type 1 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

The standard installati<strong>on</strong> arrangements for Type 1 (Style P3 or DE) b<strong>on</strong>ds are<br />

shown in Figure E30 and Figure E31. On timber sleepers, the b<strong>on</strong>d should be<br />

fixed using 6” x 5/8” coach screws (railway cat no: 35/13950). Approximately<br />

25mm clearance between the b<strong>on</strong>d fixing lug and the underside of the coach<br />

screw is required to allow settlement of the sleepers without causing the b<strong>on</strong>d<br />

fixing lugs to come under strain. For installati<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers, see<br />

Figure E36.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Leads<br />

Figure E30<br />

Figure E31<br />

76<br />

Timber Timber<br />

200<br />

P3<br />

585 CRS<br />

E 34 R A I L T R A C K<br />

76<br />

Timber Timber<br />

76<br />

D.E.<br />

585 CRS<br />

200<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Leads


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E35 of 52<br />

16.4 Type 0 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

The standard installati<strong>on</strong> arrangements for a Type 0 (Style B, DD, M, M2, M5 or<br />

M6) b<strong>on</strong>d is shown in Figure E32, Figure E33, Figure E34 & Figure E35 . On<br />

timber sleepers, the b<strong>on</strong>d should be fixed using 6” x 5/8” coach screws (Railway<br />

Catalogue No: 35/13950). Approximately 25mm clearance between the b<strong>on</strong>d<br />

fixing lug and the underside of the coach screw is required to allow settlement of<br />

the sleepers without causing the b<strong>on</strong>d fixing lugs to come under strain. For<br />

installati<strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers, see Figure E36.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Leads<br />

Figure E32<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Leads<br />

<br />

Timber Timber<br />

710 CRS<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 35<br />

76<br />

B<br />

200<br />

Timber Timber<br />

DD<br />

710 CRS<br />

200<br />

76


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E36 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Leads<br />

Figure E34<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Leads<br />

Figure E35<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Timber Timber<br />

200<br />

585 CRS<br />

E 36 R A I L T R A C K<br />

`M'<br />

76<br />

Timber Timber<br />

M2. M5.<br />

700 CRS<br />

200<br />

16.5 C<strong>on</strong>crete Sleeper Fixing Arrangements<br />

The fixing of impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds to c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers/bearers requires the<br />

sleeper/bearer to be drilled off centre. This problem is overcome by using<br />

adjustable fixing straps (see Figure E36). Signal Engineering staff are permitted<br />

to drill holes in c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers, however, these may <strong>on</strong>ly be drilled <strong>on</strong> the<br />

centre line of the sleeper. If c<strong>on</strong>crete bearers are required to be drilled, prior<br />

agreement should be obtained from the Permanent Way Engineer.<br />

76


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

17 Aluminium Busbars<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

400<br />

Figure E36<br />

Sleeper Drilled 18 <strong>on</strong> Centre Line X 95 Deep (Min) Metal<br />

Anchor HSL M12/25 Hilti Code 6692 2 Off<br />

M20 X 50 L<strong>on</strong>g Hex. Hd. Screw<br />

Sleeper Not To Be Drilled<br />

Typical Arrangement if Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

Fixing to C<strong>on</strong>crete Sleepers<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E37 of 52<br />

3 X 45 degree Chamfer<br />

40 65<br />

140<br />

3 Fillet Weld<br />

7.5 Radius<br />

All Dimensi<strong>on</strong>s in mm<br />

16.6 Safety Labelling<br />

Warning labels as described in Secti<strong>on</strong> 14 should be fitted to the outside of the<br />

auxiliary coil terminal box cover.<br />

17.1 Introducti<strong>on</strong><br />

The various layouts and installati<strong>on</strong> arrangements of aluminium busbars are<br />

shown <strong>on</strong> the drawings as described below:<br />

Inter–track circuit c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s are shown in Figure E37 and Figure E38. Details<br />

of busbar lengths and Railway Catalogue Nos. are given in Figure E39, Figure<br />

E40, Figure E41 and Figure E42.<br />

Busbar drillings for c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> to the b<strong>on</strong>d and rail side leads are shown in<br />

Figure E28, Figure E29 and Figure E39.<br />

Style S impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds are fitted with down–set busbars. Details can be found<br />

in Figure E37, Figure E38, Figure E39 and Figure E40.<br />

Installati<strong>on</strong> details of the aluminium busbars are shown in Figure E26, Figure<br />

E27, Figure E28, Figure E29 and Figure E43.<br />

Installati<strong>on</strong> of the busbar to earlier types of impedance b<strong>on</strong>d is shown in Figure<br />

E32, Figure E33, Figure E34 and Figure E35.<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 37<br />

Ø 16<br />

18<br />

30<br />

12<br />

"<br />

40<br />

"


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E38 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

17.2 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d Lug Plates<br />

In the case of the Style P3 impedance b<strong>on</strong>d, the busbar is not secured directly to<br />

the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d lug plate as with all other impedance b<strong>on</strong>d types. A<br />

separate lug plate (Railway Catalogue No. 88/27761) is required, as shown in<br />

Figure E44. This is secured to the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d lugs with four 1¼” x 3 /8”<br />

hexag<strong>on</strong> headed BSW bolts, plain spring washers and nuts, which are provided<br />

with the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

17.3 Packing Pieces<br />

The arrangement of packing pieces required between busbar and sleeper is<br />

shown in Figure E29. The packing pieces are illustrated in Figure E45. They are<br />

not attached to the sleepers but secured to the busbar using No.10 x 1¼” wood<br />

screws.<br />

17.4 Busbar Restrictor<br />

The busbar is maintained in positi<strong>on</strong> by a busbar restrictor arrangement. This<br />

comprises a pair of side stops (Railway Catalogue No 88/27760) as shown in<br />

Figure E46. The side stops incorporate a steel rod assembly to prevent<br />

excessive vertical movement. Installati<strong>on</strong> of the busbar restrictor is shown in<br />

Figure E43.<br />

17.5 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> Arrangements<br />

Figure E37 shows the various c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> arrangements to be applied to Type 3 impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds installed in new<br />

works. C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s for maintenance replacement of other types of impedance b<strong>on</strong>d are shown in Figure 38.<br />

E 38 R A I L T R A C K


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Notes<br />

*<br />

Intertrack Cables A<br />

* IRJ<br />

Intertrack CablesB<br />

2 For details of all busbars see Figure E39.<br />

Item 1<br />

DOUBLE RAIL TRACK CIRCUIT TO NO TRACK CIRCUITED LINES<br />

T.P. Huts Neg Return B<br />

Item 3<br />

IRJ<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit to Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Substati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

4 Tracti<strong>on</strong> Return cable sizes : A = 240mm2 Aluminium B = 800mm2 Aluminium<br />

5 Where TI.21 <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> rail b<strong>on</strong>ds require to share the first sleeper bay with the tracti<strong>on</strong> return cable,<br />

they must be taped to the tracti<strong>on</strong> return cable. Orange pipe must not be used<br />

IRJ<br />

IRJ<br />

T.P Hut Neg Return A Neg Reinforcing CableB<br />

* IRJ<br />

Intertrack Cables A<br />

Item 5<br />

IRJ<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit to Single Rail <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

T.P. Huts Or Cross B<strong>on</strong>ding Sites.<br />

1 All lugs complete with bolts, nuts and washers for negative cross b<strong>on</strong>ding substati<strong>on</strong>s and T.P. hut<br />

cable attached to busbar to be supplied and fitted by Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer.<br />

3 For full details of layouts see Figure E26, Figure E27, Figure E28.<br />

6 The Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineers lugs to be attached to the top of the busbar (Figure E55 for marking jig).<br />

7 Impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds at substati<strong>on</strong>s and T.P. Huts to be sited in co-operati<strong>on</strong> with the Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer.<br />

8 In all layouts a l<strong>on</strong>ger busbar may be provided where necessary to accommodate reinforcing cables.<br />

* Cross track orange plastic pipe for protecti<strong>on</strong> of signalling cables.<br />

*<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

*<br />

*<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E39 of 52<br />

* *<br />

Intertrack Cables A<br />

Substati<strong>on</strong> Neg ReturnB<br />

* IRJ<br />

Intertrack Cables B<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 39<br />

Item 4<br />

IRJ<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit to Single Rail <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> Substati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

N.B. This Arrangement is Also Used at Sites Other Than Substati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

IRJ<br />

IRJ<br />

Item 2<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit to Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

Substati<strong>on</strong> Neg Returns<br />

Intertrack Cables B<br />

Item 6<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Intermediate B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

At Substati<strong>on</strong><br />

T.P. Huts or Cross B<strong>on</strong>ding Sites<br />

B<br />

*<br />

*<br />

Neg Reinforcing Cable<br />

See Note 9<br />

B<br />

T.P. Hut<br />

B<br />

Neg Return<br />

Intertrack CablesA<br />

Item 7<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Intermediate<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d T.P. Huts Or Cross B<strong>on</strong>ding Sites


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E40 of 52<br />

Notes<br />

* IRJ<br />

Intertrack Cables A<br />

* IRJ<br />

Intertrack Cables B<br />

Item 1<br />

Intertrack Cables B<br />

IRJ<br />

IRJ<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit to N<strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> Circuited Lines<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit to Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Substati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

T.P Hut Neg Return A<br />

* IRJ<br />

Intertrack Cables A<br />

Intertrack Cables A<br />

Item 3<br />

Substati<strong>on</strong>s Neg Return B<br />

Substati<strong>on</strong>s Neg Return B<br />

IRJ<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit to Single Rail <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

T.P. Huts or Cross B<strong>on</strong>ding Sites.<br />

1 All lugs complete with bolts, nuts and washers for negative cross b<strong>on</strong>ding substati<strong>on</strong>s and T.P. hut<br />

cable attached to busbar to be supplied and fitted by Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer.<br />

2 For details of all busbars see Figure E39.<br />

3 For full details of layouts see Figure E27, Figure E28.<br />

*<br />

*<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Intertrack<br />

Cables<br />

4 Tracti<strong>on</strong> Return cable sizes : A = 240mm2 Aluminium B = 800mm2 Aluminium<br />

5 Where TI.21 <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> rail b<strong>on</strong>ds require to share the first sleeper bay with the tracti<strong>on</strong> return cable,<br />

they must be taped to the tracti<strong>on</strong> return cable. Orange pipe must not be used.<br />

*<br />

T.P. Huts Neg Return A<br />

* *<br />

Intertrack Cable A<br />

* IRJ<br />

Intertrack Cables B<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Intermediate B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

at Substati<strong>on</strong><br />

E 40 R A I L T R A C K<br />

B<br />

Intertrack Cables B<br />

6 The Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineers lugs to be attached to the top of the busbar (See Figure E55 for marking jig).<br />

7 Impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds at substati<strong>on</strong>s and T.P. Huts to be sited in co-operati<strong>on</strong> with the Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer.<br />

8 In all layouts a l<strong>on</strong>ger busbar may be provided where necessary to accommodate reinforcing cables.<br />

* Cross track orange plastic pipe for protecti<strong>on</strong> of signalling cables.<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

IRJ<br />

IRJ<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit to Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

T.P. Huts Or Cross B<strong>on</strong>ding Sites<br />

Intertrack Cables B Substati<strong>on</strong>s Neg Return B<br />

IRJ<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit to Single Rail <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong> Substati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Substati<strong>on</strong><br />

Neg Returns B<br />

Substati<strong>on</strong><br />

Neg Returns<br />

B<br />

*<br />

*<br />

Substati<strong>on</strong>s Neg Return B<br />

T.P. Hut<br />

Neg Returns<br />

Intertrack Cables A<br />

Item 5 Item 6 Item 7<br />

Figure E38 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> Arrangements (Other than<br />

Type 3)<br />

Item 2<br />

Item 4<br />

Double Rail <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Intermediate<br />

B<strong>on</strong>d T.p. Huts or Cross B<strong>on</strong>ding Sites<br />

B


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

17.6 Busbar Details and Layouts<br />

Figure E39 shows busbar drilling layouts.<br />

2 Holes 12 Dia<br />

B<br />

Figure E39<br />

P3<br />

M6<br />

WH3 or MR<br />

15<br />

15<br />

11<br />

11<br />

6 Holes 14 Dia<br />

15<br />

15<br />

6 Holes 12 Dia<br />

100<br />

6 Holes 18 Dia<br />

4 Holes 14 Dia<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E41 of 52<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 41<br />

55<br />

55<br />

50<br />

55<br />

44.5<br />

51<br />

45<br />

25<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

19<br />

76<br />

25<br />

44.5<br />

75<br />

20<br />

M,M2,M5<br />

15<br />

15<br />

6 Holes 14 Dia<br />

DE<br />

DD<br />

6 Holes 14 Dia<br />

4 Holes 14 Dia<br />

55 44.5<br />

100<br />

100<br />

50<br />

19<br />

44.5<br />

50 19<br />

57<br />

41<br />

25<br />

35<br />

38<br />

35<br />

22


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E42 of 52<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Figure E40 gives details of Style S impedance b<strong>on</strong>d busbar and drilling layouts.<br />

20<br />

75<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

45<br />

Material<br />

E 42 R A I L T R A C K<br />

#<br />

#<br />

4000<br />

Before Bending<br />

100<br />

800<br />

Before Bending<br />

100<br />

Aluminum Plate 150mm X 6mm to BS 2898(E1) In 4 Metre Lengths to<br />

Railway Catalogue No 88/24804<br />

5 Metre Lengths are Available to Railway Catalogue No 88/24805<br />

Holes Marked # are for Temporary Side Lead C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Figure E40<br />

#<br />

#<br />

220 45 20<br />

6 Holes 18 Dia<br />

150 100<br />

220<br />

45 o<br />

6 Holes 18 Dia<br />

75 R<br />

75 R<br />

45<br />

150 100<br />

45 o<br />

20<br />

75<br />

90<br />

75<br />

90


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E43 of 52<br />

Figure E41 shows the layout of Style S impedance b<strong>on</strong>d busbars.<br />

Busbar Joint<br />

IRJ<br />

IRJ<br />

Busbars: One L<strong>on</strong>g ( Drill and cut as required) and <strong>on</strong>e short<br />

IRJ<br />

IRJ<br />

Busbar: One L<strong>on</strong>g (Cut flush with sleeper edge if required)<br />

Busbar: One Short<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Figure E41<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 43


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E44 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

The layout of Style S impedance b<strong>on</strong>d busbar c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s is shown in Figure<br />

E42<br />

Note<br />

4 x M16 x 50 LG Hex. HD Bolts<br />

4 x M16 Self Locking Nuts. EZP.<br />

Recommended Torque 90Nm<br />

8 X M16 Washers<br />

E 44 R A I L T R A C K<br />

20 Min<br />

50 Max<br />

1 Ensure all Mating Surfaces are Wire Brushed Thoroughly and Coated With<br />

Electrolytic Paste (Catalogue No 7/262001) Before Assembly<br />

2 This Drawing to be Read in C<strong>on</strong>juncti<strong>on</strong> With Figure E40 & Figure E41<br />

Figure E42<br />

The busbar restrictor assembly is shown in Figure E43.<br />

2 X 6mm Starlock Push On Fasteners Uncapped Finish EZP.<br />

6 Dia Rod X 180 L<strong>on</strong>g Steel BS970.070 M20<br />

Busbar See Fig 14<br />

Busbar Packing Planed Deal<br />

Size 150 X 75 X 35<br />

Busbar Side Stops<br />

to be Fitted to all<br />

Busbars Which Extend<br />

Bey<strong>on</strong>d the Sec<strong>on</strong>d +<br />

Sleeper Bed from B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

Except Where a<br />

Double/Double Installati<strong>on</strong><br />

Occurs Side Stops Secured:<br />

To Timber Sleepers by No 12 X 2" Woodscrews<br />

To C<strong>on</strong>crete Sleepers<br />

Drill Sleeper <strong>on</strong> Centre Line<br />

5/16" Dia X 2" Deep Insert Nyl<strong>on</strong> Rawlplug M8.96.008.<br />

Locate Side Stop. Hammer in Steel Round Head Zinc<br />

Plated Drive Screw 14 Gauge X 40mm Through 1/4"<br />

Phosphorus Br<strong>on</strong>ze Serrated Lock Washer.<br />

Figure E43


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E45 of 52<br />

Figure E44 shows the lug plate for style P3 impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds.<br />

Figure E44<br />

= =<br />

41 41<br />

41<br />

Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d Busbar Packing (Railway Catalogue No. 88/27772) is shown in<br />

Figure E45.<br />

150<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 45<br />

270<br />

248<br />

75 32<br />

Material Planed Deal, End Grain To T<br />

Figure E45<br />

Impedance b<strong>on</strong>d busbar side stop details are shown in Figure E46.<br />

42<br />

50<br />

Figure E46<br />

50<br />

2 Holes 08 Dia<br />

T<br />

30 50<br />

11


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E46 of 52<br />

18 Side Leads<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

18.1 Side Lead Manufacture<br />

Impedance b<strong>on</strong>d and busbar side leads are manufactured in accordance with<br />

Figure E47 & Figure E48 and the tables in Figure E49, Figure E50 & Figure<br />

E51.<br />

Figure E47 shows the general procedure in diagrammatically form:<br />

45<br />

1. Strip Back Insulati<strong>on</strong><br />

2. Crimp Lugs<br />

3. Fit heat shrink tube<br />

(where required) and label<br />

37/2.25 Aluminium Cable<br />

Catalogue No 6/116601<br />

Heat Shrink Tube with Sealant<br />

Catalogue No 55/118332<br />

E 46 R A I L T R A C K<br />

45<br />

OR<br />

Clear heat shrink tube to completely cover adhesive<br />

paper label. For colour of label, legend and Railway<br />

Catalogue No see Figure E48, Figure E49,<br />

Figure E50 and Figure E51.<br />

Label size 50 x 20 nom fitted this end <strong>on</strong>ly<br />

Figure E47<br />

Figure E48 gives cable lengths (dimensi<strong>on</strong> A) for crimped lug and busbar<br />

c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s. It should be used in c<strong>on</strong>juncti<strong>on</strong> with the cables in Figure E49,<br />

Figure E50 and Figure E51 which give details for each group of cables (green,<br />

white or orange group) according to the rail c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>.


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

A<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E47 of 52<br />

B H or E B H or E C A<br />

Item 1<br />

Item 2<br />

Item 3 / 4<br />

A<br />

A A<br />

A<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

A<br />

D A or E D<br />

Item 6<br />

A or E D A or E<br />

Item 7<br />

Item 5<br />

A<br />

D A or E F A or E D A or E<br />

Item 8 Item 9 Item 10<br />

C A or E G H or E G<br />

Item 11/12<br />

Item 13/14<br />

E<br />

Item 15<br />

A A A<br />

Note The relative positi<strong>on</strong> of the lugs is different <strong>on</strong> items 1 & 2, 5 & 6, 7 & 8<br />

and 9 & 10.<br />

Cable End C<strong>on</strong>nectors are listed below with the (former) Southern Regi<strong>on</strong> Drawing No.<br />

and Railway Catalogue No.<br />

C<strong>on</strong>nector Type SR Drawing No Catalogue No.<br />

A Rail Lug 50° (Pin Drive) ME72-86 55/27630<br />

B B<strong>on</strong>d Lug (P3) ME72-88 55/27629<br />

C B<strong>on</strong>d Lug (DD & DE) ME72-92 55/27626<br />

D B<strong>on</strong>d Lug (M, M2, 5 & 6) ME72-89 55/27627<br />

E Rail Lug (Stud Fixing) 20° M39-34/1 54/39307<br />

F B<strong>on</strong>d Lug (B) ME72-91 55/27625<br />

G BusBar and B<strong>on</strong>d Lug (S, MR & Type 3) ME72-107 55/27631<br />

H Rail Lug 20° (Pin Drive) M39-34/2 55/27614<br />

Figure E48<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 47<br />

A<br />

A<br />

A


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E48 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Figure E49 gives details of Green Group Cables (For C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> to Cembre<br />

Studs).<br />

Item Cable C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> Green Label Legend Catalogue<br />

No.<br />

Length<br />

(mm)<br />

Lug<br />

Types<br />

1 P3 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top P3 to M12 Stud Top 88/29464 715 B & E<br />

2 P3 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom P3 to M12 Stud Bottom 88/29463 715 B & E<br />

3 Busbar to Rail L<strong>on</strong>g Busbar to M12 Stud L<strong>on</strong>g 88/29462 # C & E<br />

4 Busbar to Rail Short Busbar to M12 Stud Short 88/29461 # C & E<br />

5 M B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top M to M12 Stud Top 88/29460 # D & E<br />

6 M B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom M to M12 Stud Bottom 88/29459 # D & E<br />

7 M2, 5 & 6 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top M2, 5, 6 to M12 Stud Top 88/29458 685 D & E<br />

8 M2, 5 & 6 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom M2, 5, 6 to M12 Stud Bottom 88/29457 660 D & E<br />

9 B B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top B to M12 Stud Top 88/29456 # F & E<br />

10 B B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom B to M12 Stud Bottom 88/29455 # F & E<br />

11 DE B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail DE to M12 Stud 88/29454 # C & E<br />

12 DD B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail DD to M12 Stud 88/29453 # C & E<br />

13 S or MR B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail S or MR to M12 Stud 88/29452 740 G & E<br />

14 Busbar to Rail Busbar to M12 Stud 88/29451 800 G & E<br />

15 Type 3 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Type 3 B<strong>on</strong>d to M12 Stud 88/29450 740 G & E<br />

Figure E49<br />

Figure E50 gives details of White Group Cables (For C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> to Pin Brazed<br />

Studs).<br />

Item Cable C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> White Label Legend Catalogue No Length<br />

(mm) (<br />

Lug<br />

Types<br />

1 P3 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top P3 to M12 Stud Top 88/29477 665 B & E<br />

2 P3 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom P3 to M12 Stud Bottom 88/29476 665 B & E<br />

3 Busbar to Rail L<strong>on</strong>g Not Required Install as Item 14 N/A N/A N/A<br />

4 Busbar to Rail Short Not Required Install as Item 14 N/A N/A N/A<br />

5 M B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top M to M12 Stud Top 88/29475 # D & E<br />

6 M B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom M to M12 Stud Bottom 88/29474 # D & E<br />

7 M2, 5 & 6 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top M2, 5, 6 to M12 Stud Top 88/29473 # D & E<br />

8 M2, 5 & 6 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom M2, 5, 6 to M12 Stud Bottom 88/29472 # D & E<br />

9 B B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top B to M12 Stud Top 88/29471 # F & E<br />

10 B B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom B to M12 Stud Bottom 88/29470 # F & E<br />

11 DE B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail DE to M12 Stud 88/29469 # C & E<br />

12 DD B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail DD to M12 Stud 88/29468 # C & E<br />

13 S or MR B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail S or MR to M12 Stud 88/29467 # G & E<br />

14 Busbar to Rail Busbar to M12 Stud 88/29466 725 G & E<br />

15 Type 3 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Type 3 B<strong>on</strong>d to M12 Stud 88/29465 665 G & E<br />

# Size not determined<br />

Figure E50<br />

E 48 R A I L T R A C K


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E49 of 52<br />

Figure E51 gives details of Orange Group Cables (For Pin Drive C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s).<br />

Note Orange Group cables are shown for reference <strong>on</strong>ly – preferred rail<br />

c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> is by 12mm dia. stud (pin brazed or Cembre).<br />

Item Cable C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> Orange Label Legend Catalogue<br />

No<br />

Length<br />

(mm)<br />

Lug<br />

Types<br />

1 P3 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top P3 to Pin Drive Top 88/29477 765 B & H<br />

2 P3 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom P3 to Pin Drive Bottom 88/29476 715 B & H<br />

3 Busbar to Rail L<strong>on</strong>g Busbar to Pin Drive L<strong>on</strong>g N/A 1070 C & A<br />

4 Busbar to Rail Short Busbar to Pin Drive Short N/A 690 C & A<br />

5 M B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top M to Pin Drive Top 88/29475 765 D & D<br />

6 M B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom M to Pin Drive Bottom 88/29474 715 D & D<br />

7 M2, 5 & 6 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top M2, 5, 6 to Pin Drive Top 88/29473 685 D & A<br />

8 M2, 5 & 6 B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom M2, 5, 6 to Pin Drive Bottom 88/29472 660 D & A<br />

9 B B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Top B to Pin Drive Top 88/29471 690 F & A<br />

10 B B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail Bottom B to Pin Drive Bottom 88/29470 690 F & A<br />

11 DE B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail DE to Pin Drive 88/29469 765 C & A<br />

12 DD B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail DD to Pin Drive 88/29468 485 C & A<br />

13 S or MR B<strong>on</strong>d to Rail S or MR to Pin Drive 88/29467 740 G & A<br />

14 Busbar to Pin Drive Busbar to Pin Drive 88/27723 800 G & H<br />

Figure E51<br />

18.2 Side Lead C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong><br />

In order to minimise imbalance of tracti<strong>on</strong> return current in the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d<br />

tracti<strong>on</strong> coil, every attempt should be made to ensure electrical balance of the<br />

two sets of rail to impedance b<strong>on</strong>d c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s. Only aluminium c<strong>on</strong>ductors<br />

should be used. Copper and aluminium side leads should not be mixed <strong>on</strong> the<br />

same impedance b<strong>on</strong>d as they have different characteristics and the b<strong>on</strong>d will<br />

become unbalanced.<br />

When a Type 3 impedance b<strong>on</strong>d is used at a site requiring <strong>on</strong>ly two side leads<br />

these should be c<strong>on</strong>nected to the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d lugs using the two holes<br />

nearest to the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d casing. At all sites where the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d<br />

lugs are at different heights, the side lead c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s to the higher lug must be<br />

fixed to the underside of the lug.<br />

If <strong>on</strong>ly the side leads <strong>on</strong> <strong>on</strong>e side of the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d are renewed, the<br />

balance should be checked afterwards, as the new <strong>on</strong>es may have been<br />

installed with a high resistance or the existing leads <strong>on</strong> the other side may not be<br />

as good as the new <strong>on</strong>es.<br />

Before any c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s are made to the aluminium plate, any burrs or<br />

protrusi<strong>on</strong>s should be removed from the mating surfaces of the plate, lug,<br />

washers and nuts. A wire brush or steel wool should then be used to make<br />

these surfaces clean and bright.<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 49


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E50 of 52<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

All c<strong>on</strong>tact surfaces should be coated with a uniform layer of jointing paste<br />

(Catalogue No. 7/26200) immediately after cleaning and any surplus cleaned<br />

away after tightening. The paste prevents moisture filling the resultant air<br />

spaces between the dissimilar metal surfaces, preventing corrosi<strong>on</strong> which occurs<br />

very rapidly, particularly when aluminium is exposed to air or moisture.<br />

Where screw and nut c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s are made to aluminium plate, eg. the<br />

aluminium busbar or P3 impedance b<strong>on</strong>d lug plate, it is essential that<br />

mechanical c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s are not over-tightened. This is because aluminium<br />

displays the property known as ‘‘cold flow” under pressure and if a certain<br />

pressure is exceeded, a flow away from the pressure area occurs and the<br />

c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> becomes loose, resulting in a high resistance c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Details of side lead/busbar c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s and torque values are shown in the<br />

tables in Figure E52 and Figure E53.<br />

Where possible, the side lead c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s should be tested, using a millivolt<br />

meter in accordance with GK/RC0754 Part G.<br />

Figure E52<br />

Type<br />

of Impedance B<strong>on</strong>d<br />

Type Of C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong><br />

Busbar(Item) Side lead (Item)<br />

Type 3 D E<br />

MR D E<br />

B A C<br />

M A A<br />

P3 A C<br />

DE A B<br />

DD A A<br />

S D E<br />

Item Descripti<strong>on</strong> Torque Setting Catalogue No.<br />

A M12 x 50 L<strong>on</strong>g Hex Hd Screw, Steel EZP 30Nm 35/101102<br />

B M12 x 70 L<strong>on</strong>g Hex Hd Screw, Steel EZP<br />

35/101142<br />

M12 Nut, Lock (Bent Beam) Steel EZP<br />

30Nm<br />

03/180167<br />

M12 Washer, Steel EZP<br />

03/190932<br />

C M10 x 50 L<strong>on</strong>g Hex Hd Screw, Steel EZP<br />

35/100842<br />

M10 Nut, Lock (Bent Beam) Steel EZP<br />

16Nm<br />

03/180166<br />

M10 Washer, Steel EZP<br />

03/190930<br />

D M16 x 50 L<strong>on</strong>g Hex Hd Screw, Steel EZP 60Nm 35/101272<br />

E M16 x 70 L<strong>on</strong>g Hex Hd Screw, Steel EZP<br />

35/101312<br />

M16 Nut, Lock (Bent Beam) Steel EZP<br />

60Nm<br />

03/180168<br />

M16 Washer, Steel EZP<br />

03/190936<br />

Figure E53<br />

E 50 R A I L T R A C K


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E51 of 52<br />

A label with the legend ”TRACTION VOLTAGE DO NOT REMOVE THIS LEAD”<br />

(see Figure E54) should be attached to or al<strong>on</strong>gside all impedance b<strong>on</strong>d leads<br />

at substati<strong>on</strong>s, TP huts and TIR sites. These cables are identified <strong>on</strong> the<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding Plan as described in GK/RC0754 Part C.<br />

TRACTION VOLTAGE<br />

DO NOT REMOVE<br />

Red Lettering <strong>on</strong> White Background<br />

Figure E54<br />

THIS LEAD<br />

18.3 Side Lead Removal<br />

An insulated b<strong>on</strong>d punch (Railway Catalogue No. 39/48850) is available and<br />

should be used for the removal of side leads from the rail where they are pinned<br />

in 22mm or 7 /8” holes. This punch may be used adjacent to the c<strong>on</strong>ductor rail<br />

provided the Railway Group Standard Code of Practice is adhered to.<br />

To prevent arcing whilst side leads are being removed or rec<strong>on</strong>nected,<br />

particularly where bolted stud c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s exist, a temporary jumper of a size<br />

equivalent to the side lead being removed, should be c<strong>on</strong>nected between the<br />

aluminium plate and the rail c<strong>on</strong>cerned before the last lead is disc<strong>on</strong>nected.<br />

If the impedance b<strong>on</strong>d side lead is identified by a label as shown in Figure E54,<br />

it can <strong>on</strong>ly be disc<strong>on</strong>nected under an absolute electric tracti<strong>on</strong> isolati<strong>on</strong> and in<br />

accordance with GK/RC0754 Part D.<br />

R A I L T R A C K E 51


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page E52 of 52<br />

19 Tracti<strong>on</strong> Negative<br />

Return Jumpers<br />

50 mm<br />

50 mm<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

These are supplied by the Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong> Engineer and are c<strong>on</strong>nected to the<br />

aluminium busbar by Signal Engineering staff in accordance with GK/RC0754<br />

Part D. A marking jig (see Figure E55) should be utilised for marking out the<br />

busbar for drilling.<br />

16.5 mm<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

NOTES<br />

63.5mm<br />

191.0mm<br />

To Be Suitably<br />

Drilled and Riveted<br />

E 52 R A I L T R A C K<br />

63.5mm<br />

20mm<br />

5 0<br />

150 mm<br />

4 Holes at 17.5 mm Dia.<br />

150 mm<br />

1. Material is aluminium plate 150 x 6 (Off cut from impedance<br />

b<strong>on</strong>d busbar.)<br />

2. Remove all burrs and sharp edges.<br />

3. Jig must be located in the centre of the bed.<br />

4. This jig is for marking out <strong>on</strong>ly.<br />

Figure E55<br />

A label with the legend ”TRACTION VOLTAGE DO NOT REMOVE THIS LEAD”<br />

(see Figure E54) should be attached to negative return jumpers at substati<strong>on</strong>s,<br />

TP Huts and TIR sites. Such leads may be disc<strong>on</strong>nected <strong>on</strong>ly under an absolute<br />

tracti<strong>on</strong> isolati<strong>on</strong> and in accordance with GK/RC0754 Part G.


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong><br />

2 Multi–meters<br />

3 The Universal<br />

Shunt Box<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page F1 of 5<br />

Part F<br />

Instrumentati<strong>on</strong> Descripti<strong>on</strong> and Use<br />

This secti<strong>on</strong> gives details of the tools and instrumentati<strong>on</strong> available for general<br />

use <strong>on</strong> track circuits.<br />

Instruments designed to be used with particular designs of track circuit can be<br />

found in the relevant Code of Practice within the track Circuit Handbook.<br />

2.1 Types<br />

In general, both analogue and digital multi–meters can be used when testing<br />

track circuits.<br />

Analogue Meters:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Lineman’s AVO HD6 : 86/11001<br />

(No l<strong>on</strong>ger available)<br />

Digital Meters:<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Megger Instruments M2006 : 40/56003<br />

Carrying Case : 40/56016<br />

Test Lead Kit : 40/17758<br />

Digital meters will usually require a loading resistor of 150kΩ (Catalogue No.<br />

86/11041) fitted to the meter to ensure that a load current is drawn when used<br />

<strong>on</strong> voltage tests.<br />

3.1 Descripti<strong>on</strong><br />

Various designs of track circuit shunt box have been produced over the years,<br />

some early designs being incapable of coping with the power dissipati<strong>on</strong><br />

requirements when shunting higher powered track circuits. The <strong>on</strong>ly design<br />

described in this handbook is the current standard design, which is suitable for<br />

use <strong>on</strong> all track circuit designs (Figure F1).<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Universal <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Shunt Box : 40/5450)<br />

Figure F1<br />

R A I L T R A C K F1


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page F2 of 5<br />

4 Rail Clip Insulati<strong>on</strong><br />

Tester<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

The shunt box has two resistance selecti<strong>on</strong> dials: 0 - 9Ω and 0 - 0.9Ω which are<br />

additive to give a combined range of 0 - 9.9Ω in 0.1Ω steps. In order to avoid<br />

overheating when left c<strong>on</strong>nected, the selected resistance is <strong>on</strong>ly placed between<br />

the test leads when the butt<strong>on</strong> is pressed.<br />

The unit comes complete with c<strong>on</strong>necting leads fitted with 4mm plugs, and with<br />

two rail clamps for making attachment to the rail foot. These clamps have upper<br />

and lower c<strong>on</strong>tact points and should be attached to a secti<strong>on</strong> of cleaned rail foot<br />

without over tightening. The c<strong>on</strong>tact points should be replaced if they become<br />

blunt.<br />

3.2 Drop Shunt Test<br />

Test:<br />

1 C<strong>on</strong>nect the shunt box across the rails at the relay end of the track circuit.<br />

2 To ensure that the clamps make a good electrical c<strong>on</strong>tact with the rails,<br />

c<strong>on</strong>nect a voltmeter between the rail heads. With zero ohms set <strong>on</strong> the<br />

shunt box and the butt<strong>on</strong> or switch operated, ensure the rail to rail voltage<br />

falls to zero.<br />

3 Set the shunt box to maximum resistance.<br />

4 Whilst keeping the butt<strong>on</strong> depressed, steadily reduce the resistance value<br />

until the track relay fr<strong>on</strong>t c<strong>on</strong>tacts are fully open and remain open. The value<br />

of drop shunt can then be read directly from the shunt box. The following<br />

points should be borne in mind:<br />

a) <strong>Track</strong> circuits do not react instantly to changes in shunt value and time<br />

should be allowed for the relay to resp<strong>on</strong>d (2-3 sec<strong>on</strong>ds is adequate).<br />

b) It is obviously impractical to start at 9.9Ω and reduce in 0.1Ω steps at 3<br />

sec<strong>on</strong>d intervals. Do a preliminary test by setting the 0 - 0.9Ω selector to<br />

0Ω and stepping down the 0 - 9Ω selector to identify the approximate<br />

value. Set the 0 - 0.9Ω selector to 0.9Ω and step down to obtain the<br />

exact value.<br />

For example, if the relay drops at 1.0Ω <strong>on</strong> the preliminary test, the actual<br />

value lies between 1.0Ω - 1.9Ω.<br />

3.3 Pick–up Shunt Test<br />

Test:<br />

1 C<strong>on</strong>nect the shunt box as for the drop shunt test and set both resistance<br />

selector switches to 0Ω..<br />

2 Whilst keeping the butt<strong>on</strong> depressed, steadily increase the resistance value<br />

until the track relay fr<strong>on</strong>t c<strong>on</strong>tacts just close. The value of pick–up shunt can<br />

then be read directly from the shunt box (as for the Drop Shunt Test, similar<br />

techniques of delayed stepping and preliminary approximati<strong>on</strong> should be<br />

used).<br />

The vast majority of c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepered track comprises a resilient insulating pad<br />

between the underside of the rail and the sleeper, with the rail secured <strong>on</strong> each<br />

side by a clip bearing <strong>on</strong> the rail foot. Insulati<strong>on</strong> is maintained by plastic pads<br />

between the clip and the rail foot.<br />

F2 R A I L T R A C K


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page F3 of 5<br />

Vibrati<strong>on</strong> causes the clip to wear through the pad, putting the rail in electrical<br />

c<strong>on</strong>tact with the c<strong>on</strong>crete, which degrades the ballast resistance, and, if the<br />

track circuit is d.c. operated, may increase the levels of residual voltage. The<br />

degradati<strong>on</strong> occurs gradually and identificati<strong>on</strong> of the failed insulati<strong>on</strong>s can be<br />

difficult.<br />

The Rail Clip Insulati<strong>on</strong> Tester, sometimes known as “PRIT” or “K9”, c<strong>on</strong>sists of<br />

a unit with an extending handle, which can be rolled al<strong>on</strong>g the rail head (see<br />

Figure F2). Metal brushes mounted <strong>on</strong> each side “sweep” the rail clips,<br />

measuring the rail to clip insulati<strong>on</strong>. Low values are indicated by an audible<br />

alarm.<br />

Descripti<strong>on</strong> Catalogue No.<br />

Rail Clip Insulati<strong>on</strong> Tester : 40/17741<br />

4.1 Operati<strong>on</strong><br />

In d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> areas, the machine must not be used <strong>on</strong> the rail adjacent to the<br />

c<strong>on</strong>ductor rail unless an isolati<strong>on</strong> has been obtained. The brushes must be fully<br />

retracted and the insulated brush guards fitted before lifting over c<strong>on</strong>ductor rails.<br />

Figure F2<br />

4.1.1 Preparati<strong>on</strong><br />

Set the brushes to the correct height.<br />

The unit is equipped with “<strong>on</strong>/off” and “polarity change” switches <strong>on</strong> the chassis<br />

and “test” and “silence alarm” butt<strong>on</strong>s <strong>on</strong> the handle.<br />

Switch “<strong>on</strong>” and set the “polarity change” switch to +ve.<br />

Press the “test” butt<strong>on</strong>, note the c<strong>on</strong>tinuous alarm t<strong>on</strong>e and then silence it by<br />

pressing the “silence alarm” butt<strong>on</strong>.<br />

If no alarm is given, or if the alarm sounds <strong>on</strong>ly when the “test” butt<strong>on</strong> is<br />

depressed, the battery should be replaced with type PP9 or equivalent and the<br />

unit re–checked.<br />

4.1.2 Use<br />

Push the unit al<strong>on</strong>g the rail.<br />

When an alarm is received, press the “silence alarm” butt<strong>on</strong> and check by re–<br />

sweeping the suspect fastening. Turn the “change polarity” switch to -ve and<br />

re–sweep: If an alarm is received, the clip is faulty; if there is no alarm, the clip<br />

<strong>on</strong> the other rail is suspect.<br />

R A I L T R A C K F3


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page F4 of 5<br />

5 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Fault<br />

Detector<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

The clip assembly should then be plainly marked for attenti<strong>on</strong> by the Permanent<br />

Way Engineer.<br />

The brush carriers can be raised/lowered to cater for flat or Pandrol type rail<br />

clips by moving the brush carrier handle to its vertical positi<strong>on</strong> to release the<br />

locking mechanism.<br />

Care must be taken to ensure that the rollers of the unit do not straddle any<br />

IRJs, causing “flicking” of adjacent track circuits.<br />

Short circuits between the rails can be difficult to locate, since, except for audio<br />

frequency types, the short circuit results in an identical drop in rail voltage al<strong>on</strong>g<br />

the length of the track circuit and gives no clue as to its physical locati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Without the <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Fault Detector, it would often be necessary to sub–<br />

divide the trackwork to locate the faulty secti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

The detector is designed to be used <strong>on</strong> the trackwork of a track circuit where the<br />

feed and relay have been disc<strong>on</strong>nected. It c<strong>on</strong>sists of two portable battery<br />

powered units: a transmitter and a receiver.<br />

Transmitter This is housed in a box incorporating an “<strong>on</strong>/off” switch and an LED<br />

indicati<strong>on</strong>. Yellow leads with clips are provided to c<strong>on</strong>nect the unit<br />

across the rails or lineside apparatus housing links. It is battery<br />

powered and outputs an intermittent high frequency voltage.<br />

Receiver This is housed in a box incorporating an “<strong>on</strong>/off” switch and an LED<br />

indicati<strong>on</strong>. It is battery powered and incorporates an internal aerial,<br />

amplifier and loudspeaker. When the receiver detects a signal<br />

from the transmitter it outputs an audible t<strong>on</strong>e.<br />

Before commencing to test the b<strong>on</strong>ding of a track circuit, the track circuit fault<br />

detector should be checked as follows:<br />

a) The transmitter leads should be c<strong>on</strong>nected together and the transmitter<br />

switched <strong>on</strong>.<br />

b) The receiver should then be switched <strong>on</strong> and held near the transmitter leads;<br />

an audible t<strong>on</strong>e should be heard emitting from the receiver (this simple test<br />

will prove that the fault detector is working correctly).<br />

c) The feed and relay ends of the track circuit under test should be<br />

disc<strong>on</strong>nected. With jointless track circuits, the track circuits either side of the<br />

track circuit under test should also be shorted out.<br />

d) The transmitter should then be c<strong>on</strong>nected across the rails at the feed end<br />

and switched <strong>on</strong>. The receiver is switched <strong>on</strong> and held near the rail; an<br />

audible t<strong>on</strong>e should be heard emitting from the receiver. No t<strong>on</strong>e may<br />

indicate a bad c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> to the rails. If the rail c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s are good, the<br />

fault is an open circuit, which may be found in the c<strong>on</strong>venti<strong>on</strong>al manner. If an<br />

audible t<strong>on</strong>e is heard, the receiver should then be carried al<strong>on</strong>g the track<br />

near to the rail and when the receiver passes the short circuit, a distinct drop<br />

in the volume of the t<strong>on</strong>e will be noted.<br />

F4 R A I L T R A C K


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

6 Mark 4 Direct Reading<br />

Phase Angle Meter<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page F5 of 5<br />

e) With audio frequency track circuits it may not be necessary to disc<strong>on</strong>nect the<br />

feed, as the receiver will detect the steady t<strong>on</strong>e of the feed frequency until<br />

the short circuit is passed. If this method does not prove successful, the<br />

transmitter should be used in the c<strong>on</strong>venti<strong>on</strong>al manner.<br />

f) The rail impedance limits the useful range of the device (as measured from<br />

the transmitter). Where this occurs, the transmitter is simply moved to<br />

another positi<strong>on</strong> within the track circuit and the test repeated.<br />

Details are c<strong>on</strong>tained in GK/RC0757 Part E.<br />

R A I L T R A C K F5


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

This page is intenti<strong>on</strong>ally blank


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong><br />

2 High Voltages<br />

3 Lineside Apparatus<br />

Housing Inspecti<strong>on</strong><br />

4 B<strong>on</strong>ding Inspecti<strong>on</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Part G<br />

Testing and Commissi<strong>on</strong>ing<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page G1 of 3<br />

The requirements for testing and commissi<strong>on</strong>ing of track circuits are detailed in<br />

the following:<br />

New Works : GK/RH 0730<br />

Maintenance/Fault Finding : GK/RH 0740<br />

Details of available instrumentati<strong>on</strong> and its uses are given in Part F.<br />

This Part details the general requirements for testing and commissi<strong>on</strong>ing.<br />

Reference should also be made to the Testing & Commissi<strong>on</strong>ing Part of the<br />

Code of Practice for the particular track circuit design involved.<br />

Ensure that warning signs (Figure E21) are fixed to all exposed track circuit<br />

capacitors and to the outside of lineside apparatus housings c<strong>on</strong>taining high<br />

voltage track circuit equipment.<br />

Details of the warning signs can be found in Part E.<br />

Check that:<br />

a) All track equipment is of the correct type, as specified in the wiring diagrams,<br />

and that applicable pin code c<strong>on</strong>figurati<strong>on</strong>s are correct.<br />

b) All equipment is correctly labelled.<br />

c) There are no prohibited combinati<strong>on</strong>s of adjoining or parallel types of track<br />

circuits.<br />

d) There are no prohibited track circuit equipment combinati<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

e) A wire count is carried out <strong>on</strong> all terminati<strong>on</strong>s, and the wiring proved correct.<br />

Check that:<br />

a) The physical positi<strong>on</strong>s of all IRJs or track ends are correct, especially those<br />

defining overlaps or clearance points.<br />

b) The physical stagger between nominally opposite IRJs does not exceed the<br />

permissible dimensi<strong>on</strong>s, and that no sub–secti<strong>on</strong> of the track circuit is shorter<br />

than the permitted minimum.<br />

c) All rail b<strong>on</strong>ds, rail jumpers, tracti<strong>on</strong> b<strong>on</strong>ds, track circuit interrupters and track<br />

feed/relay cables are in accordance with the b<strong>on</strong>ding plan and scheme plan,<br />

and are secure.<br />

R A I L T R A C K G1


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page G2 of 3<br />

5 IRJ Inspecti<strong>on</strong><br />

6 Performance Test<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

5.1 Testing of IRJs<br />

IRJs should be visually checked for indicati<strong>on</strong>s of insulati<strong>on</strong> deteriorati<strong>on</strong>, general<br />

c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong> and rail burring over the insulati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

If an IRJ is suspect, a possessi<strong>on</strong> of the track circuits c<strong>on</strong>cerned should be<br />

obtained and the IRJ tested for insulati<strong>on</strong> break–down with the track circuits<br />

taken out of service. The metallic comp<strong>on</strong>ents of the IRJ being tested should be<br />

cleaned to allow a good electrical c<strong>on</strong>tact with the test leads. If the insulati<strong>on</strong><br />

resistance between either plate and rail is less than 2kΩ at 50V, thew joint is<br />

likely to fail or has partially failed and requires attenti<strong>on</strong>. The Engineering<br />

Supervisor should be notified so that arrangements can be made with the<br />

Permanent Way Engineer to replace the faulty IRJ.<br />

In the case of d.c. track circuits, IRJ’s may be tested with the track circuits in<br />

service under certain c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s. This procedure is described in GK/RC0755<br />

Part F.<br />

5.2 Prefabricated IRJs<br />

Edil<strong>on</strong> and similar prefabricated IRJs must be tested with a 50V insulati<strong>on</strong> tester<br />

prior to installati<strong>on</strong> in the track, taking care that the IRJ assembly is not in<br />

c<strong>on</strong>tact with any c<strong>on</strong>ducting surface.<br />

Test:<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

a) Between the two rails.<br />

b) Between both fishplates and the two rails.<br />

c) Between each bolt and the two rails.<br />

The minimum acceptable reading is 500kΩ..<br />

a) The track circuit should be energised and adjusted in accordance with the<br />

relevant secti<strong>on</strong> in this handbook. If difficulties are experienced, refer to the<br />

Fault Finding Procedures.<br />

b) Ensure that the polarity/phase is correct and that the correct electrical<br />

stagger is achieved.<br />

c) <strong>Track</strong> circuit interrupters must be tested by disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

d) Ensure that all adjoining track circuits are energised. Remove the feed links<br />

of the track circuit under test to check that <strong>on</strong>ly the correct track relay or<br />

relays resp<strong>on</strong>d. Check that any remaining extraneous voltage <strong>on</strong> the track<br />

relay does not exceed that permitted for the particular track circuit design<br />

(see the Testing & Commissi<strong>on</strong>ing Part in the Code of Practice for the<br />

relevant track circuit).<br />

e) Set the shunt box to the minimum permitted drop shunt value, and apply<br />

sequentially at all extremities and at selected places within any S & C, to<br />

prove the functi<strong>on</strong>ality of the track circuit b<strong>on</strong>ding; the correct track relay<br />

must be seen to drop each time. For jointless track circuits, prove that the<br />

theoretical extremities are the actual extremities.<br />

G2 R A I L T R A C K


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page G3 of 3<br />

f) Carry out a corresp<strong>on</strong>dence test between the rails of each track circuit and<br />

any indicati<strong>on</strong>s or to the final TPR, where no indicati<strong>on</strong>s are provided.<br />

A track circuit must not be commissi<strong>on</strong>ed until the pers<strong>on</strong> in charge of S&T work<br />

is satisfied that the rail surface is sufficiently free of rust and other c<strong>on</strong>taminati<strong>on</strong><br />

to ensure correct shunting.<br />

R A I L T R A C K G3


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

This page is intenti<strong>on</strong>ally blank.


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong><br />

2 Routine Examinati<strong>on</strong><br />

3 Drop Shunt Test<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Part H<br />

Maintenance<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page H1 of 2<br />

This Part is a general guide to the principles of track circuit maintenance.<br />

Procedures specific to a particular design of track circuit are given in the relevant<br />

Code of Practice within the <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Handbook.<br />

Instructi<strong>on</strong>s regarding maintenance of track circuits are given in GK/RH0740 and<br />

GK/RC0241.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> circuit maintenance can be classified into the following activities:<br />

a) Routine Examinati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

b) Drop Shunt Test.<br />

c) Full Test.<br />

The objective of the examinati<strong>on</strong> is to find/remove potential failures and to<br />

ensure that, as far as possible, the track circuit will functi<strong>on</strong> satisfactorily until the<br />

next examinati<strong>on</strong>. The examinati<strong>on</strong> is mainly visual and can be undertaken<br />

without any need for possessi<strong>on</strong> of the track circuit.<br />

Any obstructi<strong>on</strong>s or c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s likely to prove detrimental to the reliability of the<br />

track circuit must be dealt with as so<strong>on</strong> as possible.<br />

The requirements and resp<strong>on</strong>sibilities for maintenance and inspecti<strong>on</strong> of b<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

are laid down in GM/TT0127 and GM/TT0128. Refer also to GK/RT0252<br />

Specific attenti<strong>on</strong> must be given to the examinati<strong>on</strong> of the following:<br />

a) <strong>Track</strong> cables and jumper cables, their c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> to the rail and clearance<br />

when passing under other rails.<br />

b) Fishplate type b<strong>on</strong>ding, including tracti<strong>on</strong> return b<strong>on</strong>ding where provided.<br />

c) Impedance b<strong>on</strong>ds and c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s where provided.<br />

d) Metallic and other c<strong>on</strong>ductive debris around insulati<strong>on</strong>s and rails.<br />

e) Point rodding, signal wires etc, touching or liable to touch either rail.<br />

f) Insulati<strong>on</strong> deteriorati<strong>on</strong> and rail burring over insulati<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

g) Rust or other rail c<strong>on</strong>taminants <strong>on</strong> the surface of the rails.<br />

The relay voltage should be checked and compared with the entries <strong>on</strong> the<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Circuit Record Card. If the value is significantly different from previously<br />

recorded values under similar weather c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s, a full test should be<br />

c<strong>on</strong>ducted.<br />

The commissi<strong>on</strong>ing drop shunt test is always carried out with the shunt box<br />

c<strong>on</strong>nected between the rails at the relay end of the track circuit.<br />

However, for routine drop shunt tests <strong>on</strong> d.c. or a.c. power frequency (50Hz -<br />

831 / 3Hz) track circuits (other than auto–coupled impedance b<strong>on</strong>d types), the<br />

R A I L T R A C K H1


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page H2 of 2<br />

4 Full Test<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

shunt box may be c<strong>on</strong>nected across the track circuit relay links in the lineside<br />

apparatus housing. The value of drop shunt obtained at the lineside apparatus<br />

housing will usually be higher than that obtained at the rails, the resistance of the<br />

relay end track leads being the most significant factor.<br />

It is <strong>on</strong>ly permissible to undertake drop shunt tests at the track circuit relay links<br />

in the lineside apparatus housing. where comparative shunts have previously<br />

been carried out both at the rails and at the lineside apparatus housing, and the<br />

two values are endorsed <strong>on</strong> the record card. It is then possible to judge any<br />

value obtained at the lineside apparatus housing relative to its theoretical<br />

railequivalent. Where such a theoretical value can be seen to approach the<br />

minimum acceptable, the test should be verified at the rails.<br />

The procedure for carrying out a drop shunt test is detailed in Part F 3.2.<br />

A variati<strong>on</strong> in the drop shunt value may be caused by variati<strong>on</strong>s in equipment<br />

performance, or by expected variati<strong>on</strong>s in envir<strong>on</strong>mental c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>s, with the<br />

drop shunt reaching the upper end of its range in wet weather and the lower end<br />

in dry weather.<br />

If the drop shunt exceeds the maximum value for the track circuit (see the<br />

relevant Code of Practice ), it is likely that the track circuit is being shunted by<br />

poor ballast or debris. The track circuit should be examined for these faults. If it<br />

appears to be in good physical c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong>, the track circuit equipment should be<br />

regarded as failed and the cause of the failure investigated through the fault<br />

finding procedure (see the relevant Code of Practice).<br />

If the drop shunt is lower than the minimum value for the track circuit (see the<br />

relevant Code of Practice), there has been an unexpected equipment failure.<br />

The Engineering Supervisor is to be informed, and immediate investigati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

undertaken to ascertain the cause of the low drop shunt value.<br />

The full test must be applied whenever alterati<strong>on</strong>s are made (eg. relaying,<br />

lead/jumper renewal, equipment replacement, adjustment, etc). The full test<br />

comprises the following:<br />

a) Carry out a Routine Examinati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

b) At the feed end, measure and record the voltages, currents and other<br />

parameters as required <strong>on</strong> the fr<strong>on</strong>t of the record card. Any adjustments<br />

required must be in accordance with the relevant secti<strong>on</strong> of this handbook for<br />

the type of track circuit under test.<br />

c) At the relay end, with the track circuit clear, measure and record the<br />

voltages, currents and other parameters required and enter <strong>on</strong> the fr<strong>on</strong>t of<br />

the record card.<br />

d) Perform a drop shunt test with the shunt box across the rails at the relay end<br />

and enter details <strong>on</strong> the record card. Where the track circuit is of a type able<br />

to be routine shunted at the relay links in the lineside apparatus housing,<br />

perform a sec<strong>on</strong>d drop shunt test at this positi<strong>on</strong> and endorse the record<br />

card with that value.<br />

e) Set the shunt box to the minimum for that track circuit and c<strong>on</strong>nect across<br />

the rails at all extremities of the track circuit, c<strong>on</strong>firming that the track circuit<br />

occupies <strong>on</strong> each occasi<strong>on</strong>. This test must obtain simultaneous track circuit<br />

occupati<strong>on</strong> where an overlapping secti<strong>on</strong> exists.<br />

H2 R A I L T R A C K


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

1 Introducti<strong>on</strong><br />

2 Categories of Failure<br />

3 Intermittent Failures<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

Part J<br />

Fault Finding<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page J1 of 5<br />

This Part gives a general outline to faults comm<strong>on</strong> to all types of track circuits;<br />

faults caused by electric tracti<strong>on</strong> systems or peculiar to a particular track circuit<br />

design are given in the appropriate Code of Practice of the <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

Handbook.<br />

When clearing a fault, details of all readings and results should be noted, to<br />

establish a logical pattern of testing and adjustment. The track circuit record<br />

card(s) should always be investigated, as deteriorating readings during<br />

maintenance can show the impending failure of a comp<strong>on</strong>ent.<br />

When a fault has been located, the relevant tests carried out up to that point<br />

should be repeated, as, in the case of multiple simultaneous faults, <strong>on</strong>e fault can<br />

mask another.<br />

Once a fault has been cleared, the track circuit must be fully tested prior to<br />

restorati<strong>on</strong>.<br />

<strong>Track</strong> circuit failures fall into the following categories:<br />

Right Side: Indicati<strong>on</strong> shows occupied with no train in the<br />

secti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Protected Wr<strong>on</strong>g Side: Indicati<strong>on</strong> shows clear when a train is in the secti<strong>on</strong>,<br />

but is caused by a failure of the indicati<strong>on</strong> system<br />

<strong>on</strong>ly; the train is still protected by the interlocking.<br />

Unprotected Wr<strong>on</strong>g Side: <strong>Track</strong> circuit or repeat relay fails to de–energise<br />

when a train is in the secti<strong>on</strong>; the train is no l<strong>on</strong>ger<br />

protected by the interlocking.<br />

The nature of the failure can be further categorised:<br />

Permanent: Failure remains static.<br />

Intermittent: Failure is <strong>on</strong>ly apparent for short periods.<br />

Intermittent faults are often the most difficult to solve, as the failure does not<br />

usually remain static l<strong>on</strong>g enough to take all necessary readings and<br />

observati<strong>on</strong>s. The following are possible causes dependent <strong>on</strong> circumstances:<br />

Vibrati<strong>on</strong> Vibrati<strong>on</strong> caused by the passage of trains can create<br />

intermittent high resistance in b<strong>on</strong>ding or intermittent<br />

short circuits between the rails (ie. the failure may<br />

remain after <strong>on</strong>e train but be cleared by a<br />

subsequent <strong>on</strong>e). Trains, or operati<strong>on</strong> of other<br />

equipment such as point machines, should be<br />

observed <strong>on</strong> site or <strong>on</strong> the signalman’s diagram; If<br />

the failure always occurs with a train at a particular<br />

point or coincides with operati<strong>on</strong> of other equipment,<br />

that geographic site should be fully investigated.<br />

R A I L T R A C K J1


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page J2 of 5<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Tracti<strong>on</strong> Interference This is usually associated with d.c. tracti<strong>on</strong> railways<br />

and arises because of the high currents necessary<br />

with the low supply voltage. If a failure occurs with<br />

trains in certain positi<strong>on</strong>s or during times of heavy<br />

traffic, the tracti<strong>on</strong> return system should be<br />

investigated.<br />

Earth Faults Due to track circuits being very “earthy”, especially<br />

during wet weather, trains at certain positi<strong>on</strong>s <strong>on</strong><br />

other lines may affect the rail to rail voltage of a track<br />

circuit, causing intermittent failures. An earth fault is<br />

usually noticed with a sec<strong>on</strong>d fault caused by a<br />

defective c<strong>on</strong>tinuity b<strong>on</strong>d.<br />

Broken Rails/B<strong>on</strong>ds These can cause intermittent c<strong>on</strong>tinuity problems.<br />

4 Right Side Failures When called to a fault, it is first necessary to determine whether the cause lies in<br />

the track circuit itself or its associated repeater circuits. This can be resolved by<br />

proceeding directly to the relay end and examining the track relay (having<br />

c<strong>on</strong>firmed that the track is supposed to be clear !). This secti<strong>on</strong> is c<strong>on</strong>cerned<br />

with fault locati<strong>on</strong> in the track circuit itself.<br />

4.1 Types of Fault<br />

Since the various track circuits used have differing types of feed units, ranging<br />

from a single d.c. cell to complex transmitters, the methods for checking these<br />

different feed units are described in the relevant Code of Practice within the<br />

<strong>Track</strong> Circuit Handbook.<br />

If the transmitter or feed is found to be functi<strong>on</strong>ing correctly, it can then be used<br />

to determine the general nature of the fault (ie. short circuit or disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>).<br />

This can be d<strong>on</strong>e by taking voltage and current measurements at the feed end<br />

as shown in Figure J1 .<br />

Figure J1<br />

Remove Link For Current Measurement<br />

J2 R A I L T R A C K<br />

A<br />

V<br />

Feed


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

A disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> in the series b<strong>on</strong>ding will:<br />

a) Reduce the current being fed into the track circuit.<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page J3 of 5<br />

b) Reduce the voltage normally dropped across the feed impedance.<br />

c) Increase the rail voltage at the feed end.<br />

A short circuit will:<br />

a) Increase the current fed into the track circuit.<br />

b) Increase the voltage dropped across the feed impedance.<br />

c) Reduce the rail voltage at the feed end.<br />

4.2 Locating a Disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong><br />

The higher rail voltage can be measured at all positi<strong>on</strong>s al<strong>on</strong>g the track circuit<br />

from the feed end up to the point of disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>. On the relay side of the<br />

disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong> the rail voltage will be very low. Fault locati<strong>on</strong> therefore entails<br />

walking through and checking the rail voltage to identify the positi<strong>on</strong> of the step<br />

change in value. The faulty b<strong>on</strong>d etc, can be c<strong>on</strong>firmed by measuring a voltage<br />

across it.<br />

4.3 Locating a Short Circuit<br />

4.3.1 <str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g><br />

The extent of the change in feed end voltages and currents will depend up<strong>on</strong> the<br />

type of track circuit and the physical positi<strong>on</strong> of the fault al<strong>on</strong>g the length of the<br />

track circuit. C<strong>on</strong>sult the relevant secti<strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>cerned with the specific type of<br />

track circuit, as appropriate. The general positi<strong>on</strong> is as follows:<br />

a) At d.c. and power frequency a.c., the rail impedance is negligible, and the<br />

resulting electrical circuit is c<strong>on</strong>stant, wherever the short circuit is located<br />

within the track circuit. Thus, any voltage across the rails, permitted by an<br />

imperfect short circuit, will be c<strong>on</strong>stant throughout the length, giving no clue<br />

as to its physical positi<strong>on</strong>.<br />

b) With audio frequencies and impulses, the rails have significant impedance,<br />

and the effect of a short circuit will vary depending up<strong>on</strong> its physical positi<strong>on</strong>.<br />

The closer it is to the feed end, the more it will increase the feed current and<br />

decrease the rail voltage.<br />

In either case, it is not possible to precisely locate the short circuit by simple<br />

observati<strong>on</strong> of rail voltage al<strong>on</strong>g the track circuit. Other methods available are<br />

as follows:<br />

4.3.2 Visual Inspecti<strong>on</strong> and Provocati<strong>on</strong><br />

This is particularly useful where track circuit equipment is not resp<strong>on</strong>sible.<br />

Examples of such a fault include signal wire or point rods touching the rails, and<br />

faulty insulati<strong>on</strong> in point c<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s etc.<br />

C<strong>on</strong>nect a meter across the rails and observe its reacti<strong>on</strong> when the item of<br />

equipment is provoked (eg. waggle the signal wire or stand <strong>on</strong> the rods, having<br />

first ensured that they will not be operated). In the case of faulty insulati<strong>on</strong>s, a<br />

hammer blow to the metalwork adjacent to the insulati<strong>on</strong> will often produce sharp<br />

changes of rail voltage. Alternatively, the insulati<strong>on</strong> should be carefully<br />

dismantled and reassembled.<br />

R A I L T R A C K J3


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page J4 of 5<br />

5 Wr<strong>on</strong>g Side Failures<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

4.3.3 Use of <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Fault Detector<br />

The track circuit fault detector comprises a test signal transmitter and a receiver,<br />

both units being self c<strong>on</strong>tained with their own battery power supply. The<br />

detector is designed to be used <strong>on</strong> a track circuit whose feed has been<br />

disc<strong>on</strong>nected and replaced by the test transmitter. However, with audio<br />

frequency track circuits, the transmitter may not be required, as the receiver will<br />

detect the steady t<strong>on</strong>e of the feed frequency.<br />

A full descripti<strong>on</strong> and details of operati<strong>on</strong> are given in Part F.<br />

4.3.4 Subdivisi<strong>on</strong> of <strong>Track</strong> Circuit<br />

This technique is particularly useful for track circuits in S & C where the secti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

of the track circuit are pieced together with jumper cables. It can be applied in<br />

other situati<strong>on</strong>s by removal of fishplates and associated b<strong>on</strong>ds in c<strong>on</strong>juncti<strong>on</strong><br />

with the Permanent Way Engineer.<br />

Note: This technique must not be applied to a tracti<strong>on</strong> return rail or jumper<br />

unless the work is under the direct c<strong>on</strong>trol of the Electric Tracti<strong>on</strong><br />

Engineer.<br />

Where the feed end test indicates a short circuit and a jumper part of the way<br />

through the track circuit is subsequently disc<strong>on</strong>nected, the effect <strong>on</strong> the feed end<br />

will provide clues as to the locati<strong>on</strong> of the short circuit. If the short circuit lies<br />

between the feed and the disc<strong>on</strong>nected jumper, the feed current and rail voltage<br />

will be largely unaffected. However, if the short circuit is between the<br />

disc<strong>on</strong>nected jumper and the relay end, the feed end test will now indicate the<br />

symptoms of a disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

4.3.5 Faulty C<strong>on</strong>crete Sleeper Insulati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

Rails <strong>on</strong> c<strong>on</strong>crete sleepers are usually insulated from the chair fastenings; the<br />

rail sits <strong>on</strong> a pad whilst clips (eg. Pandrol clips) bear <strong>on</strong> a plastic insulati<strong>on</strong> piece<br />

against the foot of the rail. It is unusual for individual faulty rail insulati<strong>on</strong>s to fail<br />

a track circuit. Rather, a number of such failures may c<strong>on</strong>tribute to a general<br />

deteriorati<strong>on</strong> of ballast resistance.<br />

For the specific investigati<strong>on</strong> of faulty rail insulati<strong>on</strong>s, a special test unit; the Rail<br />

Clip Insulati<strong>on</strong> Tester, is available. For the applicable descripti<strong>on</strong> and operating<br />

instructi<strong>on</strong>s see Part G.<br />

4.3.6 Failure of Insulated Rail Joints<br />

Care must be taken when attempting to check the insulati<strong>on</strong> resistance of IRJs<br />

in situ due to the parallel path provided by the ballast <strong>on</strong> either side of the joint.<br />

Methods of testing IRJs are given in Part G.<br />

5.1 Rail Surface<br />

Permanent or intermittent wr<strong>on</strong>g side failures involving loss of train shunt can<br />

occur because of a poor rail surface due to rust, leaf debris, oil film, or crushed<br />

coal/sand/ballast. The surface c<strong>on</strong>diti<strong>on</strong> should be visually checked throughout<br />

the track circuit and suitably cleared if possible.<br />

At locati<strong>on</strong>s where oil film or rust is excessive and speeds are less than 5 mph<br />

(eg. locomotive depots, terminal stati<strong>on</strong>s), a stainless steel “zig–zag” strip can be<br />

applied to the surface of the running rail by the Permanent Way Engineer.<br />

J4 R A I L T R A C K


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page J5 of 5<br />

5.2 Faulty <strong>Track</strong> Relay<br />

It is possible that a track relay may be mechanically damaged in some way which<br />

prevents it properly de–energising. A check should be made to see that the<br />

relay operates correctly when a shunt is applied.<br />

5.3 Extraneous Interference<br />

It is possible that the track circuit is receiving energy from other than its own feed<br />

unit. Disc<strong>on</strong>nect the feed and c<strong>on</strong>firm that the relay voltage is less than 30% of<br />

its drop–away value.<br />

5.4 Gaps In <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

This is a problem arising particularly <strong>on</strong> electric tracti<strong>on</strong> railways due to the need<br />

to provide parallel alternative paths for tracti<strong>on</strong> return current in the rails, but can<br />

arise in any situati<strong>on</strong> where the b<strong>on</strong>ding is not in series. It can be seen from<br />

Figure J2 that defective b<strong>on</strong>ding in the tracti<strong>on</strong> return rail can lead to a wr<strong>on</strong>g<br />

side failure; a train between the two disc<strong>on</strong>nected b<strong>on</strong>ds would not shunt the<br />

track circuit current. Yellow B<strong>on</strong>ding is now provided to prevent such<br />

occurrences. Where parallel b<strong>on</strong>ding exists, it must be inspected and short<br />

circuits applied to c<strong>on</strong>firm correct detecti<strong>on</strong>.<br />

Figure J2<br />

Two Disc<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

R A I L T R A C K J5


Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

This page is intenti<strong>on</strong>ally blank


<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

References<br />

Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page Ref1 of 2<br />

(Railway Group Standards references correct as at Catalogue 13)<br />

Railway Standards<br />

GK/RC0741 Signalling Maintenance Specificati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

GK/RH0751 Train Detecti<strong>on</strong> Handbook<br />

GK/RC0755 D.C. <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

GK/RC0756 HVI <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

GK/RC0757 50Hz. <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

GK/RH0730 Signalling Testing Handbook<br />

GK/RH0740 Signalling Maintenance Testing Handbook<br />

GK/RT0004 Symbols for use <strong>on</strong> Signalling Plans and Sketches<br />

GK/RT0009 Identificati<strong>on</strong> of Signalling Related Equipment<br />

GK/RT0011 Train Detecti<strong>on</strong><br />

GK/RT0031 Lineside Signals and Indicators<br />

GK/RT0201 Signalling Design Producti<strong>on</strong><br />

GK/RT0251 <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

GK/RT0252 Reinforcement of <strong>Track</strong> Circuit B<strong>on</strong>ding (Yellow B<strong>on</strong>ding<br />

GM/TT0126 Producti<strong>on</strong> and Modificati<strong>on</strong>s of B<strong>on</strong>ding Plans and the<br />

Installati<strong>on</strong> of B<strong>on</strong>ding <strong>on</strong> all Electrified Lines except the<br />

SE, SC & SW Divisi<strong>on</strong>s of NSE.<br />

GM/TT0127 Inspecti<strong>on</strong> of B<strong>on</strong>ds <strong>on</strong> all Electrified Lines except the SC, SE<br />

& SW Divisi<strong>on</strong>s of NSE.<br />

GM/TT0128 Maintenance and Inspecti<strong>on</strong> of Negative B<strong>on</strong>ding <strong>on</strong> the SC,<br />

SE & SW Divisi<strong>on</strong>s of NSE.<br />

GM/TT0129 Producti<strong>on</strong> of Drawings for and the Installati<strong>on</strong> of Negative<br />

B<strong>on</strong>ding <strong>on</strong> the SC, SE & SW Divisi<strong>on</strong>s of NSE.<br />

RT3170 <strong>Track</strong> Safety Handbook<br />

G0/RT3091 D.C. Electrified Line Instructi<strong>on</strong>s.<br />

GS/ES0872 Railway Signaling Cable<br />

BR863 Impedance B<strong>on</strong>ds for use with <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

SSP 62 Replacement of Colour Light Signals to Danger<br />

BRS-SE 33 Channel Pin for <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Rail B<strong>on</strong>ds<br />

BRS-SM 104/11 Stake (Angle) for <strong>Track</strong> Side Equipment (1070)<br />

BRS-SM 104/13 Stake (Angle) for <strong>Track</strong> Side Equipment (760)<br />

RAILTRACK Ref1


Railway Group Approved Code of Practice<br />

GK/RC0752<br />

Issue Two<br />

Date December 1998<br />

Page Ref2 of 2<br />

Withdrawn Document<br />

Unc<strong>on</strong>trolled When Printed<br />

<str<strong>on</strong>g>General</str<strong>on</strong>g> <str<strong>on</strong>g>Informati<strong>on</strong></str<strong>on</strong>g> <strong>on</strong> <strong>Track</strong> <strong>Circuits</strong><br />

Railway Standards (c<strong>on</strong>tinued)<br />

BRS-SM 318 Facing Point Layouts Left and Right Hand Drives<br />

BRS-SM 319 Single and Double Slip Layout Right Hand Drive<br />

BRS-SM 320 Single and Double Slip Layout Left Hand Drive<br />

BRS-SM 374 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Interrupter Assembly<br />

BRS-SM 375 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Interrupter Body Unit<br />

BRS-SM 376 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Interrupter Insulati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

BRS-SM 411 Taper Pin for <strong>Track</strong> Circuit C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong>s<br />

BRS-SM 622 C<strong>on</strong>crete Bearer Layout, S&T Equipment<br />

BRS-SM 848 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Cables Plate for Rail C<strong>on</strong>necti<strong>on</strong><br />

BRS-SM 849 <strong>Track</strong> Circuit Cables Flange Clip/Cable Clip for Cable<br />

Terminati<strong>on</strong>s<br />

BRS-SM 2200 Rail Clamp Point Lock MK2 Facing Point Layout Single Acting<br />

Cylinders & Cast Body<br />

BRS-SM 2228 Rail Clamp Point Lock MK2 Double Slip Points Layout Single<br />

Acting Cyl - Cast Body - A6 Mods<br />

BRS-SM 2240 Rail Clamp Point Lock MK2 Switch Diam<strong>on</strong>d Layouts<br />

BRS-SM 2244 Rail Clamp Point Lock MK2 Point Layout with Hydraulic<br />

Actuators Tandem Turnout in 113FBV Rail for Cast Body<br />

Single Acting Cylinder<br />

BRS-SM 2260 Rail Clamp Point Lock Facing Point Layout for UIC-541113A<br />

Plain Lead Switches<br />

MD82017 Flat Bottom Rail Soleplate for Use with F.P.L.<br />

Ref2 RAILTRACK

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!